Seat Mii Edition 10.13 2013 Electric Vehicle Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 306
1 of 306

Summary of Content for Seat Mii Edition 10.13 2013 Electric Vehicle Owner's Manual PDF

OWNERS MANUAL

Mii

1S L0 12 72 0B A

In gl

s 1

S L0

12 72

0B A

( 10

.1 3)

( G

T9 )

M ii

I ng

l s

( 10

.1 3)

SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.

Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.

No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.

SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el Copyright. Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.

Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.

SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.10.13

Foreword

This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help preserve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the information concerning accessories, modifications and part replace- ments.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the vehicle.

Table of Contents

About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Vehicle diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Exterior views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Driver door overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview of the driver side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Overview of centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Detail of the passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Symbols on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 SEAT information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Prior to a journey... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Tips for driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Vehicle key set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Central locking* and locking system . . . . . . . . . . 32 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Opening and closing the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated 47 Adjusting the seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Child seats (accessories) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Windscreen wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Loading luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Ashtray and Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Electrical power socket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Starting, changing gears, parking . . . . . . . . . . 119 Stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Braking, stopping and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Parking sensor system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Cruise control* (Cruise control system - CCS) . . . 152

Safety Assist* (City Safety Assist function) . . . . . 155 Hill hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Hill driving assistant* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning system . .164

At the filling station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Care, cleaning and maintenance . 180

In the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . 180 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Vehicle care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Care and cleaning the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . 197 Caring for and cleaning the vehicle interior . . . . 205 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Accessories, replacements, repairs and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Notes for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Engine management and exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Practical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Vehicle tool kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

3Table of Contents

Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Anti-puncture kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Towing and tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

4 Table of Contents

5About this manual

About this manual

What you should know before reading this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the ve- hicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the Mii, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the tech- nical requirements and on the market; this should is in no way be interpre- ted as dishonest advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual re- fer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when oth- erwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some ver- sions, or are only offered in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright sym- bol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

The section is continued on the following page.

Marks the end of a section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol contain relevant information concerning envi- ronmental protection.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

6 Exterior views

Vehicle diagram

Exterior views

Side view

Fig. 1 Vehicle side view

Legend for the Fig. 1:

Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Fuel tank plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

1

2

Exterior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Additional turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 266

Jack position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

3

4

5

6

7Exterior views

Front view

Fig. 2 Detail of the front of the vehicle

Legend for the Fig. 2:

Mirror support with laser sensor laser for the City Safety As- sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Windscreen

Front windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Lever for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 266

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 266

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Front towlines anchorage housing behind a cover . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Front number plate holder

8

9

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

8 Exterior views

Rear view

Fig. 3 Detail of the rear of the vehicle

Legend for the Fig. 3:

Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Bulb for high-level brake lights

Rear window

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 266

1

2

3

4

5

6

Handle with button for opening the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Registration plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Rear number plate holder

Sensors for the parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . . 149

7

8

9

10

9Vehicle interior

Vehicle interior

Driver door overview

Fig. 4 Overview of the controls of the driver door

Legend for the Fig. 4:

Button for operating the electric windows of the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Interior door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Deadlock control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1

2

3

Turn switch for adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Exterior mirror adjustment

Heated exterior mirrors

Central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Open bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

4

5

6

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

10 Vehicle interior

Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

7

8

Other controls

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be equipped with electric window mechanical window winders, or mechanical adjustment of the rear view mirrors page 93.

Overview of the driver side

Fig. 5 Overview of the driver side

11Vehicle interior

Legend for the Fig. 5:

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Light off or daytime driving light --

Side/dipped lights

Fog lights

Headlamp range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Lever for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Main beam headlights

Headlight flasher

Turn signals

Cruise control system (CCS) /+ /- 152

Instrument panel:

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Digital display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Windscreen wiper/ windscreen wash lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Windscreen wipers

Intermittent wipe

Brief wipe x

Windscreen wipers

Automatic windscreen wash/wipe

Rear window wiper

Automatic rear window wash/wipe

Lever with buttons for controlling the SEAT information system - , / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Horn (works only when the ignition is on)

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Steering column adjustment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Driver front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

10

11

12

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

12 Vehicle interior

Overview of centre console

Top part of the centre console

Fig. 6 Detail of the top part of the centre console

Legend for the Fig. 6:

SEAT Portable System (supplied by SEAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Passenger front airbag off warning lamp PASSENGER AIR- BAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Right seat heating controls or rear window heating but- ton (alternative position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 164

1

2

3

4

Radio (factory-fitted) Booklet Radio system, cover or stor- age compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Left seat heating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Rear window heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Start-Stop system button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Switches for:

Heating and ventilation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

5

6

7

8

9

13Vehicle interior

Bottom part of the centre console

Fig. 7 Detail of the bot- tom part of the centre console

Legend for the Fig. 7:

Storage compartment with drink holder in the centre console 113

Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

12 volt socket or cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 115

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Lever for:

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Button for:

City Safety Assist function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

1

2

3

4

5

6

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

14 Vehicle interior

Detail of the passenger seat

Fig. 8 Overview of the passenger side

Legend for the Fig. 8:

Position of passenger front airbag on the dash panel . . . . . . . 65

Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

In the side of the dash panel: Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Handle of the storage compartment or storage compartment open1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

1

2

3

4

Symbols on the roof

Symbol Meaning

Interior lights page 82.

1) According to version

15Instrument panel

Instrument panel

Control and warning lamps

The control and warning lamps are indicators of warnings, , faults or certain functions. Some control and warning lamps come on when the ig- nition is switched on, and switch off when the engine starts running, or while driving.

When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard.

Symbol Meaning See

Handbrake applied.

page 134

Do not continue driving! The brake fluid level is too low or there is a fault in the brake system.

lights: Do not continue driving! The liquid coolant level is too low, the engine liquid coolant temperature is too high or there is a fault in the liquid coolant system.

page 189

flashes: Engine coolant system faulty. page 189

Do not continue driving! Engine oil pressure too low.

page 185

lights up or flashes: Do not continue driv- ing! Fault in the steering.

page 147

On the instrument panel: Driver or passen- ger has not fastened seat belt. page 56

Instrument panel display: A passenger in the rear seats has fastened their seatbelt.

Symbol Meaning See

A passenger in the rear seats has not fas- tened their seat belt.

page 56

Faulty generator. page 193

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system: it is necessary to start the engine manually.

page 160

flashes in addition to the rest of the seg- ments of the fuel gauge: Fuel tank almost empty.

page 171

flashes quickly: The City Safety Assist sys- tem* function brakes automatically or has braked automatically. Or: flashes slowly: City Safety Assist function is not currently available.

page 155

The City Safety Assist* function has been connected manually. It switches off after 5 seconds.

flashes: The City Safety Assist* function has been manually disconnected.

after the ignition is switched on: Indication for the approach of the end of the period for an inspection to be carried out.

page 17

lights: ESC* faulty or disconnected by the system. ALTERNATIVELY: flashes: ESC* or ASR regulating.

page 134

lights: Traction Control faulty or switched off by the system. ALTERNATIVELY: flashes: Traction Control regulator operat- ing.

ABS faulty or does not work.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

16 Instrument panel

Symbol Meaning See

Rear fog light switched on. page 82

lights up or flashes: Fault in catalytic con- verter. page 237

Fault in engine management.

lights up or flashes: Fault in the steering system.

page 147

Fuel tank almost empty. page 171

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tension- ers.

page 65

lights: the Start-Stop system is enabled. AL- TERNATIVELY: flashes: the Start-Stop system is not availa- ble. page 160

The Start-Stop system is enabled but the en- gine cannot be automatically stopped.

Left or right turn signal. page 82

Hazard warning lights on. page 241

Cruise control operating. page 152

Main beam on or flasher on. page 82

The natural gas engine coolant temperature is too low.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

Park the vehicle away from the traffic, ensuring that there are no easi- ly inflammable materials under the vehicle which could come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel).

A faulty vehicle represents a risk of accident for the driver and for oth- er road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers.

Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool.

In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injuries page 180.

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

17Instrument panel

Instruments

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Control and warning lamps page 15

Gear engaged display (automatic gearbox) page 124.

Instructions for inspection intervals Booklet Maintenance Programme

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury.

Do not operate the instrument panel controls when driving.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

18 Instrument panel

Detail of instrument panel

Fig. 9 Instrument panel, on dash panel: variant 1

Fig. 10 Instrument panel, on dash panel: variant 2

Details of the instruments Fig. 9 or Fig. 10:

Speedometer. Depending on the vehicle in km/h or in mph.

Displays on the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1

2

Reset knob for trip recorder (trip).

Press the button 0.0/SET briefly to switch between trip re- corder and odometer.

Press the button 0.0/SET for approximately. 5 seconds to reset the odometer to zero and, where necessary, other signals of the multifunction display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Fuel reserve display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

3

4

19Instrument panel

Rev counter (with the engine running, in thousands of revo- lutions per minute).

The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accel- erator) before the needle reaches the red zone .

Clock set button.

If necessary, change the time display by pressing the top and bottom buttons of the rocker switch Fig. 11 B .

Press the button to change the hour, so that it is flash- ing.

To continue setting the time, press button 0.0/SET . Hold button down to scroll through the numbers quickly.

Press the button again to change the minutes, so that it is flashing.

To continue setting the time, press button 0.0/SET . Hold button down to scroll through the numbers quickly.

Press button again to end the clock setting.

CAUTION When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only re- main in the red zone for a short period of time.

For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel consumption and noise.

5

6

Note On the screen of the SEAT Portable System (supplied by SEAT) page 222 the other instruments can be seen, such as an outside temperature indica- tor.

Display messages

A variety of information can be viewed on the instrument panel display Fig. 9 and Fig. 10 2 , depending on the vehicle equipment:

Warning and information messages

Odometer

Time

Outside temperature

Selector lever positions page 124

Recommended gear (manual gearbox) page 124

Multifunction display (MFI) page 22

Service interval display page 21

Start-Stop system status display page 160

Fuel gauge page 171

Seat belt status display for rear seats page 56

Warning and information messages

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the ig- nition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults in the opera- tion are displayed on the screen using red and yellow symbols on the in- strument panel display (page 15) and, in some cases, with audible warn- ings. The display may vary according to the type of instrument panel fitted.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

20 Instrument panel

Type of mes- sage

Symbol colour

Description

Priority 1 warning.

Red

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ! Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Priority 2 warning.

Yellow

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct levels may cause damage to the vehi- cle! Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, request assistance from special- ised personnel.

Odometer

The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distance travelled since the last odometer re- set. The last figure indicates 100 m.

Outside temperature indicator

When the outside temperature is below +4 C (+39 F), the symbol ice crys- tal (warning of risk of freezing) is also displayed next to the temperature. At first this symbol flashes and then it remains lit until the outside tempera- ture rises above +6 C (+43 F) .

When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera- ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual outside temperature as a result of heat coming from the engine.

The temperatures measured range from -40 C to +50 C (-40 F to +122 F).

Selector lever positions

The range of engaged gears of the selector lever is shown on the side of the lever, and on the instrument panel display. In positions D and M, and with the Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also indicated on the display.

Recommended gear* (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear to save fuel can be displayed on the instrument panel display while you are driving page 124.

Seat belt status display for rear seats *

The seat belt status display on the instrument panel display informs the driver, when the ignition is switched on, whether any passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts page 56.

Start-Stop system status display

The instrument panel display shows information on the current status page 160.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

A faulty vehicle represents a risk of accident for the driver and for oth- er road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers.

Park the vehicle away from the traffic, ensuring that there are no easi- ly inflammable materials under the vehicle which could come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel).

21Instrument panel

WARNING

Although the outside temperature is above freezing, some roads and bridges may be frozen.

At an outside temperature of above +4 C (+39 F), even when the ice crystal is not visible, there may still be ice on the road.

Never rely on the outside temperature indicator!

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Note Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary.

Note When several warnings are active at the same time, the symbols are shown successively for a few seconds. The symbols will stay on until the fault is rectified.

Service interval display

The inspection display appears on the instrument panel display Fig. 9 or Fig. 10 2 .

SEAT makes a difference between services with engine oil change (Interval Service) and services without engine oil change (Inspection Service). The service interval display only gives information for service dates which in- volve an engine oil change. The dates of the remaining services (for exam- ple, the next Inspection Service or change of brake fluid) are listed on the label attached to the door strut, or even in the Maintenance Programme.

The set service intervals have been specified with the service dependent on time/distance travelled.

Inspection reminder

If the inspection period is due to expire shortly, Inspection reminder ap- pears when starting the ignition abbreviated to and a warning in km. The number of kilometres shown is the maximum number that may be driven until the next service.

Service due

After the service date, an audible warning is given when the ignition is switched on and the abbreviation displayed on the screen flashes for a few seconds.

Note The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when OK is pressed on the windscreen wiper lever.

Note In vehicles in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be correct. In this case, please check the maximum permitted service intervals Booklet Maintenance Pro- gramme.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

22 Instrument panel

SEAT information system

Introduction

With the ignition switched on it is possible to access different messages via the display on the instrument panel display.

The number of messages displayed on the instrument panel display will vary according to the vehicle electronics and equipment.

A specialised dealer will be able to programme or modify additional func- tions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Additional information and warnings:

Instrument panel page 18

Exterior mirrors page 93

Driver assistance systems page 149

Radio Booklet Radio

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury.

Do not consult the messages on the instrument panel screen when driving.

Note On the screen of the SEAT Portable System (supplied by SEAT) page 222 other functions of the vehicle can be seen.

Control functions of the instrument panel display

Fig. 11 Windscreen wip- er lever: button A to confirm the options and rocker switch B to change the options

Calling up options

Switch the ignition on.

If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press OK/RESET

(Fig. 11 A ).

Press the top or bottom part of the rocker switch B until the desired op- tion appears.

Multifunction display (MFI)

The multifunction display (MFI) has two automatic memories: 1 - Partial memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown in the lower right-hand corner of the display.

23Instrument panel

With the ignition switched on, and memory 1 or 2 displayed, briefly press OK to change from one memory to another.

1

Trip memo- ry (for a single jour- ney).

The memory stores the values for the journey and the con- sumption from the moment the ignition is switched on un- til it is switched off again. If the journey is broken for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically erased. If the journey is continued in less than 2 hours after the ignition is switched off, the new da- ta is added to the data already stored in the memory.

2 Total mem- ory (for all journeys).

The memory stores the values of any number of journeys, until it counts a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes of driv- ing, or 1999.9 km or miles of driving, depending on the type of instrument panel fitted. On reaching either of these limits, the memory is automatically erased and starts to count from 0 again.

Possible displays

Menu effect

Time Current time in hours (h) and minutes (min).

Journey duration This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition was switched on.

Current fuel consump- tion

The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the vehicle stopped, in li- tres/hour.

Average fuel consump- tion

After turning on the ignition, average fuel con- sumption in litres/100 km will be shown after trav- elling approximately 100 metres. Otherwise hori- zontal lines are displayed. The value shown is up- dated approximately every 5 seconds.

Operating range Approximate distance in km that can still be travel- led with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming the same style of driving is maintained. This is cal- culated using the current fuel consumption.

Menu effect

Distance covered Distance travelled, after ignition is switched on, in km.

Average speed After starting the ignition, the average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Otherwise horizontal lines are displayed. The value shown is updated approximately every 5 seconds.

Digital display of speed

Current speed displayed digitally.

Liquid coolant temper- ature digital display

Digital display of the current temperature of the en- gine liquid coolant.

Warning at --- km/h If the stored speed is exceeded (between 30 - 250 km/h, or 18 - 155 mph), an audible warning is given together with a visual warning.

Changing between display modes

Press the rocker switch in the windscreen wiper lever.

Storing a speed for the speed warning

Select the display Speed warning at --- km/h.

Press OK on the windscreen wiper lever to store the current speed and switch off the warning.

In addition, set the required speed by pressing the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or buttons or on the multifunction steering wheel for 5 seconds. Next, press OK again or wait a few seconds. The speed is stored and the warning activated.

To switch off, press OK . The stored speed is deleted.

Manually erasing memory 1 or 2

Select the memory to be erased.

Press and hold the eject button OK for approximately 2 seconds.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

24 Instrument panel

Note On the screen of the SEAT Portable System (supplied by SEAT) page 222 other functions of the multifunction display can be seen.

25Before starting the engine

Prior to a journey...

Before starting the engine

Tips for driving

Introduction

Depending upon how you expect to use your vehicle, it may a good idea to protect the engine from below. A guard underneath the engine may help to reduce the risk of damage to the lower part of the vehicle and the oil sump when driving over kerbs, or along dirt tracks or rough roads... Before instal- lation, SEAT recommends going to a SEAT dealership.

Additional information and warnings:

Ensure you are correctly seated page 47

Transporting page 95

Starting, changing gears, parking page 119

Ecological driving page 144

Notes for the user page 233

WARNING

Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics may result in severe accidents and even loss of life.

Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics may significantly alter per- ception, affect reaction times and safety while driving, which could result in the loss of control of the vehicle.

Journey preparations and safe driving

Check list

For your own safety, for the safety of passengers in the car, and for that of other road users, the following should be checked before and during each journey :

Check that the lights and turn signals operate correctly.

Check the tyre pressures (page 210) and level of fuel (page 171).

Ensure there is good visibility through all the windows.

Make sure that all objects and bags in the storage compartments, in the luggage compartment and, where applicable, on the roof, are se- curely fastened page 95.

Ensure there is nothing obstructing the free passage of the foot ped- als.

Use child retention systems appropriate for the child's body weight and height page 74.

Correctly adjust front seat, head rests and rear-view mirrors to suit your height page 47, page 93.

Wear close-fitting shoes which do not prevent you from using the pedals correctly.

The driver's floor mat should be fixed to the floor, leaving the pedal area unobstructed.

Before starting out, ensure you are correctly seated and remain in this position throughout the journey. This applies to all passengers in the vehicle page 47.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

26 Before starting the engine

Check list (Continued)

Correctly fasten your seat belt before starting to drive and keep it se- curely fastened throughout the journey. This applies to all passengers in the vehicle page 56.

Never carry more passengers than the number of available seats and seat belts in your vehicle.

Never drive with impaired faculties (for example, due to medication, alcohol or drugs).

Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic, for example, to reset or switch on a menu, by other passengers or to answer a phone call.

Always try to adapt the speed of the vehicle and your style of driving to the condition of the ground or the road and to weather and traffic conditions.

Observe the highway code and speed limits.

On long journeys, rest at regular intervals (at least every 2 hours).

If carrying animals, make sure they are correctly restrained in accord- ance with their weight and size.

WARNING

Always observe traffic regulations and speed limits and try to anticipate traffic movements. Correctly anticipating traffic situations may mean the difference between arriving safe and sound at your destination or having a serious accident.

Note Regular servicing of your vehicle not only helps to keep it in good working order but also helps to ensure road safety. Therefore, please ensure the ve- hicle is taken for service as indicated in the Maintenance Programme. If the vehicle is subjected to hard use, it may require certain maintenance work before the next service date. Hard use may involve frequent driving in traffic jams or driving in dusty areas. For further information, please refer to a SEAT dealership or a specialised workshop.

Driving abroad

Check list

In some countries, certain safety regulations and requirements are in force relating to exhaust gas emissions, which differ from the technical character- istics of the vehicle. Before travelling abroad, SEAT recommends you con- sult a SEAT dealership about the legal requirements and the following points:

Does the vehicle need technical modifications for driving abroad, for example, adjustment of the headlamps?

Does the vehicle have all the tools, diagnostics equipment and spare parts required for inspections and repairs?

Are there any SEAT dealers in the destination country?

For petrol vehicles: Is unleaded petrol available at the right octane rating?

Are a suitable engine oil (page 185) and other engine fluids com- plying with SEAT specifications available in the destination country?

Does the Portable Navigation System (supplied by SEAT) function page 222 in the destination country with the available navigation information?

Are special tyres required in the destination country?

27Before starting the engine

CAUTION SEAT does not accept liability for any damage to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genu- ine spare parts.

Driving along flooded roadways

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driving through water, for example, along a flooded road, please observe the following:

Check the depth of the water before entering the flooded zone. The wa- ter should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork .

Do not drive faster than a pedestrian.

Do not stop in the water, use reverse gear or switch off the engine.

Oncoming traffic will cause waves which raise the level of the water, making it difficult to cross the water.

Disconnect the Start-Stop system whenever crossing water.

WARNING

When driving through water, mud, melted snow, etc., please remember that due to damp or frozen brake discs and shoes in winter, the braking effect may be delayed, therefore the required braking distance is greater.

Dry the brakes and remove ice by braking carefully. Ensure that you are not endangering other road-users or breaking traffic regulations in the process.

After driving through water, avoid sudden sharp manoeuvres.

CAUTION Driving through flooded areas may severely damage vehicle compo- nents such as the engine, transmission, running gear or electrical system.

Never drive through salt water as salt causes corrosion. Always rinse any parts of the vehicle which have been in contact with salt water.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

28 Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Vehicle key set

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Adjustments to the SEAT information system page 22

Central locking and locking system page 32

Start and stop the engine page 119

Notes for the user page 233

Emergency locking and unlocking page 244

WARNING

Swallowing batteries with a diameter of 20 mm or other types of lithium battery may quickly result in serious injuries or even death.

Always keep the vehicle keys and the key tab with the batteries, spare batteries, flat batteries and other types of batteries larger than 20 mm out of the reach of children.

Immediately seek medical assistance if you suspect the swallowing of a battery.

WARNING

Careless or incorrect use of vehicle keys may result in severe injury and accident.

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. Children and unauthorised individuals could lock the doors or the rear lid, start the engine or turn the ignition on activating electrical systems, for example: the electric windows.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get them- selves to safety. For example, depending on the time of the year, temper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or ex- tremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, partic- ularly for young children.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering may lock and it will not be possible to turn the steering wheel.

29Opening and closing

Remote control vehicle key*

Fig. 12 Remote control key

Remote control key

With the vehicle key the vehicle may be locked or unlocked remotely page 32.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and battery. The receiver is in the interi- or of the vehicle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new battery is several metres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised page 31 or the battery changed page 31.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used.

Folding the key shaft in and out

When the button is pressed Fig. 12 A , the key shaft is released and un- folds.

To fold it press the button and fold the key shaft in until it locks in place.

Duplicate keys

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key must contain a microchip and be coded with the data from the vehicle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not con- tain microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a SEAT dealership, a Specialised workshop or approved key service qualified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use page 31.

CAUTION The remote control key contains electronic components. Protect the vehicle keys from damage, impacts and humidity.

Note Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Push- ing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also possible even when you are outside the radius of action.

Note Remote control key operation can be greatly influenced by overlapping ra- dio signals around the vehicle working in the same range of frequencies (for example, radio transmitters, mobile telephones).

Note Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather condi- tions and discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the re- mote control.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

30 Opening and closing

Note If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed Fig. 12 or one of the central locking buttons page 32 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking briefly disconnects as protection against overloading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock the vehicle if necessary.

Vehicle mechanical key

Fig. 13 Vehicle mechani- cal key

The vehicle key set may include a mechanical key Fig. 13.

Duplicate keys

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key must contain a microchip and be coded with the data from the vehicle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not con- tain microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a SEAT dealership, a Specialised workshop or approved key service qualified to create this kind of key.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

Fig. 14 Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, the control lamp flashes Fig. 14 (arrow) once briefly. If the button is pressed and held, the indica- tor blinks several times, for example: for the convenience opening function.

When the control lamp does not light upon pushing a button, the batteries of the vehicle key must be changed page 31.

31Opening and closing

Changing the battery

Fig. 15 Vehicle key: bat- tery compartment cover

Fig. 16 Vehicle key: re- moving the battery

SEAT recommend having the batteries changed in a specialised workshop.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehicle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

Unfold the key shaft page 29.

Remove the cover from the back of the vehicle key Fig. 15 in the direc- tion of the arrow .

Extract the battery from the compartment using a suitable thin object Fig. 16.

Place the new battery in the compartment, pressing in the direction of the arrow as shown Fig. 16 .

Fit the battery compartment cover, pressing in the direction of the arrow as shown Fig. 15 until it clicks into place.

CAUTION If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged.

Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.

When fitting the battery, check that the polarity is correct.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the envi- ronment.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is pos- sible that the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked using the key. In this case, the vehicle key must be synchronised once more as follows:

Unfold the key shaft page 29.

Press the button on the vehicle key. For this, it must remain with the vehicle.

Open the vehicle within one minute using the key shift.

Turn on the ignition using the vehicle key. The key has been synchron- ised.

If necessary, fit the cap.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

32 Opening and closing

Central locking* and locking system

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when all the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key.

The battery of a vehicle left unlocked during a long period (for instance, in a private garage) may run down and fail to start the motor.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Vehicle key set page 28

Doors page 37

Rear lid page 39

Electric windows page 42

Emergency locking and unlocking page 244

WARNING

The incorrect use of the central locking system may cause serious inju- ries.

The central locking system will lock all doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can prevent any non-authorised individual from opening the doors and accessing the vehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or accident, locked doors will complicate access to the vehicle interior to help the passengers.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. The cen- tral locking button can be used to lock all the doors from within. There- fore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures.

WARNING (Continued)

Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in seri- ous injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

Never leave individuals locked in a closed and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle by themselves or get help.

Description of the central locking system

The central locking system allows all doors and the rear lid to be locked and unlocked centrally.

From outside, using the vehicle key.

From inside, by pushing the central locking button page 34.

The central locking system can be activated or deactivated at a specialised workshop.

In case of a vehicle key fault or central locking system fault, all doors can be locked or unlocked manually.

Locking the vehicle after the airbags have been deployed

If the airbags are deployed due to an accident, the vehicle will be automati- cally and completely unlocked. Depending on the amount of damage, the vehicle can be locked following an accident in the following ways:

33Opening and closing

effect Necessary operations

Lock the vehicle, by pushing the central locking button:

Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. Push the central locking button .

Use the key to lock the vehicle:

Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. OR: Remove the key from the ignition. Open any door just once. Lock the vehicle with the key.

Note If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed page 28 or one of the central locking buttons Fig. 19 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking briefly disconnects as protection against overloading. In this case, the vehicle remains unlocked for about. 30 seconds. If no doors or the rear lid are opened during this time, the vehicle will subsequently become locked automatically.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the exterior

Fig. 17 Buttons on the vehicle key

Fig. 18 Vehicle mechani- cal key

Central locking

effect Handling the buttons on the vehicle Fig. 17

Handling the vehicle key Fig. 17 in the lock cylinder or with the vehicle mechanical key Fig. 18.

Unlocking the vehicle.

Press button . Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder of the driver door and turn the key in an anticlock- wise direction.

Lock the vehicle. Press button . Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder of the driver door and turn the key in a clockwise direction.

Unlocking the rear lid.

Press button . Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder of the driver door and turn the key in an anticlock- wise direction.

Locking the rear lid.

Press button . Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder of the driver door and turn the key in a clockwise direction.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

34 Opening and closing

Please note: Depending on the operating of the central locking set by the Specialised workshop, in order to unlock all the doors and the rear lid, press the button twice.

The vehicle key only locks and unlocks the vehicle if it is within range of the vehicle and if the battery has enough power.

Upon locking the vehicle, all turn signals will flash once in confirmation.

Upon unlocking the vehicle, all turn signals will flash twice in confirma- tion.

If the turn signals do not flash in confirmation, at least one of the doors or the rear lid has been left unlocked.

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key. If you unlock the vehicle without opening any doors or the rear lid, it will lock again automatically after a few seconds. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.

Mechanical locking

effect Handling the vehicle mechanical key Fig. 18 in the lock cylinder.

Locking the driver door manually.

To unlock, insert the vehicle key into the lock cyl- inder of the driver door and turn the key in an anticlockwise direction.

To lock, insert the vehicle key into the lock cylin- der of the driver door and turn the key in a clock- wise direction.

Locking and unlocking the rear lid.

To unlock, insert the vehicle key into the lock cyl- inder of the driver door and turn the key in an anticlockwise direction.

To lock, insert the vehicle key into the lock cylin- der of the driver door and turn the key in a clock- wise direction.

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the vehicle key.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

Fig. 19 In the driver door: central locking but- ton

Fig. 20 In the passenger door: Door handle for me- chanical locking

35Opening and closing

Central locking

Push the button Fig. 19:

Unlocking the vehicle.

Lock the vehicle.

The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

If the vehicle has been locked with the vehicle key, the central locking but- ton does not operate.

Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your vehicle:

The deadlock will not activate page 35.

It will not be possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside this may offer extra safety, when stopped at traffic lights for example.

The doors can be opened and unlocked individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. If necessary, pull the door release lever twice.

The driver door cannot be locked when it is still open. This avoids lock- ing the vehicle key inside the vehicle when there is nobody inside.

Mechanical locking

The doors are locked by pressing the door lever, so that the red mark be- comes visible Fig. 20 1 .

To unlock a door, pull its corresponding door lever.

If the vehicle becomes locked, take note of the following:

The deadlock will not activate page 35.

It will not be possible to open the doors from the outside, when stopped at traffic lights for example.

The doors can be opened and unlocked individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle.

The driver door cannot be locked using the central locking system when it is still open. This avoids locking the vehicle key inside the vehicle when there is nobody inside.

Deadlock system Safe*

effect Necessary operations

Locks the vehicle with the dead- lock.

Press the button once on the vehicle key.

Locks the vehicle without the deadlock.

Press the button twice on the vehicle key.

Press the central locking button on the driver door once.

When the vehicle is locked, the deadlock deactivates the door handles, making the vehicle difficult to open. The doors cannot be opened from in- side .

Upon switching off the ignition, the deadlock switched on warning will ap- pear on the instrument panel display (deadlock or SAFELOCK).

When the deadlock is switched off:

The vehicle can be opened and unlocked from the inside using an inside door handle.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

36 Opening and closing

Control lamp on the driver door

When the vehicle is locked: Meaning

The red LED flashes for approximately 2 seconds at short intervals and then more slowly.

The deadlock is switched on.

The red LED flashes for about two sec- onds then turns off. After 30 seconds, the LED flashes again.

The deadlock is switched off.

The red LED flashes for about two sec- onds at short intervals. Subsequently, the light will remain switched on for about. 30 seconds.

There is a fault in the locking system. Contact a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Careless use of the deadlock can cause serious injury.

Never leave anybody inside the vehicle if this is locked using the key. When the deadlock is activated, doors cannot be opened from the inside!

When the doors are locked, it is difficult to get to passengers in the vehicle interior in case of an emergency. Passengers could remain trap- ped inside in case of emergency.

37Opening and closing

Doors

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Vehicle key set page 28

Central locking and locking system page 32

Emergency locking and unlocking page 244

WARNING

If a door is not correctly closed, it could open unexpectedly when driving and cause serious injuries.

Always stop immediately and close the door.

When closing, ensure that the door has closed correctly. A closed door should be flush with the corresponding parts of the bodywork.

Open and close doors only when nobody is in the way of the door.

WARNING

A door held open by its retainer could be blown closed by the wind or close if the vehicle is on a hill causing injury.

When opening and closing doors, always use the door handle.

Note On the display of the SEAT Portable System (supplied by SEAT), page 222 can be seen if at least one vehicle door has been left open or is not correctly closed.

Childproof lock

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.

Fig. 21 Childproof lock on the left hand side door

This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated and deactivated manually, as described below:

Activating the childproof lock

Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to acti- vate the childproof lock.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni- tion key, anticlockwise for the left hand side doors Fig. 21 and clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

38 Opening and closing

Deactivating the childproof lock

Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you want to deactivate.

With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the igni- tion key, anticlockwise for the right hand side doors and clock- wise for the left hand side doors Fig. 21.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside. The childproof lock can be activated and deactivated by inserting the key in the groove when the door is open, as described above.

39Opening and closing

Rear lid

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Central locking page 32

Transporting page 95

Emergency locking and unlocking page 244

WARNING

Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and closing of the rear lid can cause accidents and serious injury.

Open and close the rear lid only when nobody is in the way.

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The rear window could break and cause injury.

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing, otherwise, it may open un- expectedly while driving. A closed rear lid should be flush with the corre- sponding parts of the bodywork.

Always keep the rear lid closed while driving to avoid toxic gases en- tering the vehicle interior.

Do not open the rear lid when there is a load installed, for example a carrier system. Likewise, the rear lid cannot be opened when a load is at- tached to it, for example bicycles. An open rear lid could close itself if there is an additional weight on it. If necessary, press down on the rear lid and remove the load.

Close and lock both the rear lid and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle. Ensure that nobody remains inside the vehicle.

WARNING (Continued)

Never allow children to play inside or around the vehicle without su- pervision, especially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the lug- gage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and ill- ness or even death, particularly for young children.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. If the ve- hicle key or the central locking button is used, they may be locked in the vehicle.

CAUTION Before opening the rear lid, ensure that there is sufficient free space to open and close it, for example if you are in a garage.

Note On the display of the Portable Navigation System (supplied by SEAT) page 222 can be seen if the rear lid has been left open or is not correctly shut.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

40 Opening and closing

Opening the rear lid

Fig. 22 On the vehicle key: Button to unlock and open the rear lid

If there are bicycles attached to a carrier situated on the rear lid, in some cases, it may not automatically open . Remove the load from the carrier and support the open rear lid.

Opening with central locking

Press the button on the vehicle key Fig. 22 for about one second to unlock the rear lid.

OR: Press the button on the vehicle key until the rear lid opens auto- matically several centimetres.

Opening the rear lid with the button.

Opening with the vehicle mechanical key

Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder of the driver door and turn the key in an anticlockwise direction page 32.

Opening the rear lid with the button.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless unlocking and opening of the rear lid could cause serious injuries.

If there is a loaded luggage carrier on the rear lid, it could be un- locked or open but not recognised as such. An unlocked or open rear lid could open unexpectedly while driving.

Note At outside temperatures of less than 0 C (+32 F), the pressurised gas struts cannot always automatically lift the rear lid. In this case, open the rear lid manually.

Closing the rear lid

Fig. 23 Rear lid open: hand grip

41Opening and closing

Closing the rear lid

Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid Fig. 23 (arrow).

Push the rear lid downwards until it locks into place in the lock.

Ensure that it is correctly closed by pulling on it firmly.

Locking the rear lid with central locking*

If the vehicle is unlocked and no doors or the rear lid are opened during about. 30 seconds, it will automatically lock again. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.

Locking is only possible when the rear lid is correctly and fully closed.

The rear lid is also locked by a central locking.

If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlocked using the button, when it is closed once more it will lock automatically.

A closed but not locked rear lid will lock automatically at a speed above about 9 km/h (6 mph).

Locking the rear lid with the vehicle mechanical key

Locking is only possible when the rear lid is correctly and fully closed.

Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder of the driver door and turn the key in a clockwise direction page 32.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking of the rear lid could cause se- rious injuries.

Never allow children to play inside or around the vehicle without su- pervision, especially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the lug- gage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehi- cle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness and even death.

Note Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage compartment.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

42 Opening and closing

Windows

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

SEAT information system page 22

Central locking and locking system page 32

WARNING

Careless use of the electric windows can cause serious injury.

Only operate the electric windows when nobody is in the way.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be locked. The windows cannot be opened in case of an emergency.

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. Af- ter turning off the ignition, the windows can be opened and closed for a short time using the buttons on the door as long as the driver door or passenger side door is not open.

CAUTION When the windows are open, rain can enter into the vehicle, dampening the interior equipment and causing damage to the vehicle.

Opening and closing the electric windows

Fig. 24 In the driver door: electric windows button

Opening and closing the windows

effect Necessary operations

Opening: Press button .

Closing: Pull the switch .

43Opening and closing

Side-opening rear windows

Fig. 25 Lever to open and close the rear win- dow

Opening

Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow A and press outwards until the lever engages.

Closing

Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow B and then press the lev- er backwards until it engages.

Opening and closing the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Central locking and locking system page 32

Roof carrier page 104

WARNING

If the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof is used negligently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury.

The sliding/tilting sunroof should only be opened or closed when no person remains in the way of it.

After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sliding/tilt- ing sunroof during a short space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION To prevent damage, when there are winter temperatures any ice or snow that there may be on the roof of the vehicle must be removed before open- ing or raising the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof.

Before leaving the vehicle or in the case of heavy rain, the sliding/tilting sunroof must always be closed. With the sliding/tilting sunroof open or raised, water can enter the passenger compartment and can cause consid- erable damage to the electrical system. As a result, other damage can occur in the vehicle.

In the case of heavy rain, if the sliding/tilting sunroof is open, the interi- or equipment of the vehicle may get wet, destroying the seat heating and damaging the electrical system of the vehicle.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

44 Opening and closing

Note Leaves and other loose objects that land in the guides of the sliding/tilt- ing sunroof should be removed periodically by hand or using a vacuum cleaner.

If the sliding/tilting sunroof does not work correctly, the anti-trap func- tion will not work either. In this case, you should take the vehicle to a speci- alised workshop.

Opening and closing the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof

Fig. 26 In the interior roof: turn the knob to open and close

Fig. 27 In the interior roof: turn the knob to raise and to close the sunroof

To raise the sliding/tilting sunroof, the knob must be in the basic position 1 .

effect Fig. 26 or Fig. 27

Action

To open the slid- ing sunroof com- pletely:

3 turn the know beyond position 2 and hold it in that position until the sunroof reaches the required position.

Put the sliding sunroof in con- venience posi- tion:

2

Turn the knob to the required position. To set the inter- mediate posi- tion:

2 to 1

To close the slid- ing sunroof com- pletely:

1

45Opening and closing

effect Fig. 26 or Fig. 27

Action

To raise the tilt- ing sunroof com- pletely:

4 briefly press the rear part of the knob.

To stop automat- ic operation:

4 or 5 Press or pull the knob again briefly.

To close com- pletely:

5 briefly pull the rear part of the knob.

The sliding/tilting sunroof only works when switched on. After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sliding/tilting sunroof during a short space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened.

All operations are interrupted when the rotary knob is actuated.

If it were not possible to close the sliding/tilting sunroof electrically, it would need to be closed manually. It is not possible to do an emergency close of the sliding/tilting sunroof without removing components of the ve- hicle. In such a case, obtain professional assistance.

Sliding blind

With the roof grab handle situated in the rear part of the roof opening, it is possible to move the sliding blind to the required position.

Note The convenience position permits sufficient ventilation with a level of sound produced by low wind.

Anti-trap function of the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of injury when closing the sliding/ tilting electric panoramic sunroof . If the sliding/tilting sunroof encoun- ters resistance or an obstacle when closing, it will immediately reopen.

Check why the sliding/tilting sunroof has not closed.

Try to close it again.

If it is still not possible to close it due to an obstacle or resistance, it will remain in the corresponding position. Close it without the anti-trap func- tion.

Closing the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof without the anti-trap function

Before approx. 5 seconds have passed since the activation of the anti- trap function, pull the knob Fig. 27 5 until the sliding/tilting sunroof is completely closed.

As such, the sliding/tilting sunroof will close without the anti-trap func- tion!

If the sunroof still cannot be closed, visit a specialised workshop.

If the knob is released during the closing operation, the sliding/tilting elec- tric panoramic sunroof opens automatically.

WARNING

Closing the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof without the anti- trap function can result in serious injury.

The sliding/tilting sunroof should always be closed carefully.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

46 Opening and closing

WARNING (Continued)

No person should ever remain in the way of the sliding/tilting sun- roof, especially when closing without the anti-trap function.

The anti-trap function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body from becoming trapped against the roof frame and injuries occur- ring.

47Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Adjusting the seat position

Introduction

Number of seats

The vehicle has a total of 4 seats: 2 front seats and 2 rear seats. Each seat is equipped with a seat belt.

Additional information and warnings:

Seat functions page 54

Seat belts page 56

Airbag system page 65

Child seats (accessories) page 74

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position in the vehicle can lead to severe injuries or death in the event of sudden braking or manoeuvres, collision or acci- dents or if the airbag deploys.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and maintain it throughout the trip. This also includes fastening the seat belt.

Never transport more people than there are seats with a seat belt available in the vehicle.

WARNING (Continued)

Children must always be protected with an approved child restraint system suited to their height and weight page 74, page 65.

Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Never, for example, put your feet on the surface of a seat or on the dash panel and never put them out of a window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt offer insufficient protection and the risk of injury in the event of an accident is increased.

WARNING

Before every trip, adjust the seat, the seat belt and the head restraints and instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly.

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm be- tween the centre of your chest and the hub of the steering wheel. Adjust the driver seat so that you are able to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees slightly angled and that the distance between your knees and the dash panel is at least 10 cm. If your physical constitution prevents you from meeting these requirements, contact a specialised workshop to make any modifications required.

Never drive with the seat backrest tilted far back. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incor- rect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Never drive with the seat backrest tilted forwards. Should a front air- bag deploy, it could throw the seat backrest backwards and injure the passengers of the rear seats.

Sit as far away as possible from the steering wheel and the dash pan- el.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

48 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

WARNING (Continued)

Keep your back straight and resting completely against the seat back- rest and the front seats correctly adjusted. Never place any part of your body in the area of the airbag or very close to it.

If passengers on the rear seats are not sitting in an upright position, the risk of severe injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web in- creases.

WARNING

Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to accidents and severe injuries.

Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary, as the seats could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion and you could lose control of the vehicle. Furthermore, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat.

Only adjust the height, seat backrest and forwards or backwards po- sition of the seat when there is nobody in the seat adjustment area.

There must be no objects blocking the front seat adjustment area.

Danger of injuries due to an incorrect sitting position

If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is properly worn. The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not positioned correctly. This could result in severe and even fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially increased when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting po- sition. The driver is responsible for all passengers in the vehicle, particularly children.

The following list shows just some examples of incorrect sitting positions which can be dangerous to all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion:

Never stand in the vehicle.

Never stand on the seats.

Never kneel on the seats.

Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the rear.

Never lean against the dash panel.

Never lie on the rear seats.

Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

Never sit sideways.

Never lean out of a window.

Never put your feet out of a window.

Never put your feet on the dash panel.

Never put your feet on the surface of a seat or seat backrest.

Never travel in a footwell.

Never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt.

Never carry any person in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe or fatal inju- ries in the event of accidents or sudden braking or manoeuvres.

All passengers must assume the proper sitting position and be prop- erly belted in while travelling.

Vehicle occupants in incorrect sitting positions, not wearing their seat belt or too close to the airbag run the risk of suffering severe or fatal injuries, particularly if the airbag deploys and hits an occupant sitting in an incorrect position.

49Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Correct sitting position

Fig. 28 The proper dis- tance between driver and steering wheel

Fig. 29 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions

The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct sit- ting position, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devi- ces. The seat belt and airbag can only provide optimum protection if a cor-

rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Serv- ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an acci- dent or sudden braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the following posi- tions:

Valid for the driver:

Adjust the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it.

Adjust the seat so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest Fig. 28 and so that you can hold the steer- ing wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions with your arms slightly bent.

The adjusted steering wheel must face your chest and not your face.

Adjust the driver seat forwards or backwards so that you are able to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees slightly angled and the distance between your knees and the dash panel is at least 10 cm Fig. 28.

Adjust the height of the driver seat so that you can easily reach the top of the steering wheel.

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly page 56.

Valid for the passenger:

Adjust the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it.

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible for optimum pro- tection should the airbag deploy.

Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly page 56.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

50 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Valid for the passengers in the rear section:

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the head restraint Fig. 28 and Fig. 29.

Short people must lower the head restraint to the first anchorage posi- tion, even if your head is below its upper edge.

Tall people must raise the head restraint completely.

Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly page 56.

Controls on the front seat

Fig. 30 Front left seat controls

The controls are mirrored for the front right-hand seat.

The front seat head restraints are integrated in the backrests and adjusting them is not possible.

Fig. 30 effect Necessary operations

1 Moving the head re- straint backwards or for- wards.

Pull the lever and move the seat for- wards. The front seat must be engag- ed when the lever is released!

2 Adjusting the seat height.

Pull the lever up or push down (sever- al times if necessary) from its home position.

3

3 doors: Easy Entry + ad- justable seat angle func- tion. 5 doors: only adjustable seat angle function.

Adjust: Pull the lever and adjust the backrest seat angle until you reach the desired position. The seat backrest must be engaged.

To fold: Pull the lever and fold the backrest. At the same time, move the seat forward.

To tilt open: Move the seat back until the catch engages. Pull the lever and tilt open the backrest. The backrest must engage in the upright position.

51Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Adjust the rear head restraints

Fig. 31 Adjusting the rear head restraints

All seats are equipped with a head restraint.

The front seat head restraints are integrated in the backrests and adjusting them is not possible.

Adjusting height

Push the head restraint up or down in the direction of the arrow with the button pressed Fig. 31 1 .

The head restraint must engage securely in position.

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the head restraint.

Adjusting the head restraint for short people

Set the head restraint in the first anchorage position, even if your head is below its upper edge. When the head restraint is at its lowest, it is possible that a small gap remains between it and the seat backrest.

Adjusting the head restraint for tall people

Raise the head restraint completely.

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted in- creases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres.

Always fit and adjust the head restraint properly whenever a person is occupying a seat.

All vehicle occupants must correctly adjust the head restraint accord- ing to their height to reduce the risk of back injuries in the event of an accident. The upper edge of the head restraint must be as close as possi- ble to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the head restraint.

Never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

52 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Removing and installing the rear head restraints

Fig. 32 Removing the rear head restraint

The rear seats are equipped with a head restraint.

Removing the rear head restraint.

Unlock the rear seat bench backrest and fold it forward page 98.

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go .

Pull the head restraint out of the fitting without releasing the button Fig. 32 1 .

Fold the backrest of the rear seat bench backwards until it is engaged.

Safely store the removed head restraints.

Removing the rear head restraint.

Unlock the rear seat bench backrest and fold it forward page 98.

Insert the head restraint into the guides on the seat backrest.

Push the head restraint down as far as it will go while pressing button 1 .

Fold the backrest of the rear seat bench backwards until it is engaged.

Adjust the head restraint to the correct position page 51.

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted in- creases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres.

Always fit and adjust the head restraint properly whenever a person is occupying a seat.

Refit any removed head restraints immediately so that passengers are properly protected.

CAUTION On removing and fitting the head restraint, make sure the head restraint does not hit the interior roof of the vehicle or the seat backrest of the front seat. This could damage the interior roof and other parts of the vehicle.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Fig. 33 Mechanical steering wheel adjust- ment

53Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

Push the lever Fig. 33 1 downwards.

Adjust the steering wheel so that you can hold onto the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions and your arms slightly bent.

Push the lever firmly upwards until it is flush to the steering column .

Adjust the correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel Fig. 28 using the controls on the driver seat page 50.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjustment function and an incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury.

After adjusting the steering column, push the lever Fig. 33 1 firm- ly upwards to ensure the steering wheel does not accidentally change po- sition while driving.

Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, stop safely and make the proper adjustment.

The adjusted steering wheel should be facing your chest and not your face so as not to hinder the driver's front airbag protection in the event of an accident.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce inju- ries when the driver's front airbag deploys.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or in any oth- er manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and head.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

54 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Seat functions

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Adjust the seat position page 47

Seat belts page 56

Airbag system page 65

Child seats (accessories) page 74

Exterior mirrors page 93

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions can cause severe injuries.

Assume the proper sitting position before your trip and remain in it throughout. This also applies to the other occupants.

Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbs away from the seat operat- ing and adjustment radius.

Seat heating*

Fig. 34 In the centre console: Front seats heating switch

The front seat cushions can be heated electrically when the ignition is switched on.

Switch off seat heating if there is nobody in the seat.

effect Action Fig. 34

To switch system on: Press button . Seat heating is switched on fully. All warning signals light up.

Adjusting the heating output:

Press the button again to adjust the desired heat.

To switch system off: Keep pressing button until all of the lights are switched off.

55Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

WARNING

People whose pain and temperature threshold has been affected by some kind of medicine, paraplegia or chronic illness (e.g. diabetes) may sus- tain burns to the back, buttocks and legs from use of the seat heating that may lead to a long healing process or that may never completely heal. Seek medical advice if you have doubts regarding your health.

People with a limit pain and temperature threshold must never use seat heating.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heating, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.

Liquids, sharp objects and insulating materials on the seat could dam- age the seat heating.

In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have the unit inspected by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

56 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Seat belts

Introduction

Check the condition of all the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced immediately by a specialised workshop . The specialised workshop must use the appropriate spare parts corresponding to the vehicle, the equipment and the model year. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Additional information and warnings:

Adjust the seat position page 47

Airbag system page 65

Child seats (accessories) page 74

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Unbuckled or badly buckled seat belts increase the risk of severe or even fatal injuries. The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if it is not fas- tened and used correctly.

Seats belts are the most effective ways of reducing the risk of sus- taining severe or fatal injuries In the event of an accident. Seat belts must be correctly fastened when the vehicle is in motion to protect the driver and all vehicle occupants.

Before each trip, every occupant in the vehicle occupants must sit properly, correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to his or her seat and keep it fastened throughout the trip. This also applies to other vehicle occupants when driving in town.

WARNING (Continued)

When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a child restraint system suitable for their weight and height and with the seat belts correctly fastened page 74.

Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and en- sure it is engaged. Using the latch plate in the buckle of another seat will not protect you properly and may cause severe injuries.

Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to enter the buckle fastenings. This could damage the buckles and seat belts.

Never unbuckle your seat belt when the vehicle is moving.

Never allow more than one passenger to share the same seat belt.

Never hold children or babies on your lap sharing the same seat belt.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belt.

WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to drive using damaged seat belts and could re- sult in serious injury or loss of life.

Avoid damaging the seat belt by jamming it in the door or the seat mechanism.

If the fabric or other parts of the seat belt are damaged, the seat belts could break in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Always have damaged seatbelts replaced immediately by seat belts approved for the vehicle in question by SEAT. Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent dam- age. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Never attempt to repair, modify or remove a seat belt yourself. All re- pairs to seat belts, retractors and buckles must be carried out by a speci- alised workshop.

57Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Warning lamp

Fig. 35 Warning lamp on the instrument panel

Fig. 36 Indication of seat belt status in the rear seats on the instru- ment panel display

Lights up or

flashes Possible cause Solution

On the instrument panel: Driver's seat belt not fastened or front pas- senger seat belt not fastened if the front passenger seat is occupied.

Fasten seat belts!

On the instrument panel: Objects on the front passenger seat.

Remove any objects from the front passenger seat and store them safely.

Instrument panel display: A pas- senger in the rear seats has not fastened their seat belt, if the seat is occupied.*

Fasten seat belts!

On the instrument panel display: A passenger in the rear seats has fastened their seat belt, if the seat is occupied.*

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

An audible warning will be heard if the seat belts are not fastened as the vehicle drives off and reaches a speed of more then 25 km/h (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The seat belt warning lamp will also flash.

The warning lamp does not switch off until the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts while the ignition is switched on.

Seat belt status display for rear seats

The seat belt status display on the instrument panel informs the driver, when the ignition is switched on, whether any passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. The symbol indicates that the passenger in this seat has fastened his or her seat belt Fig. 36.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

58 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

The seat belt status is displayed for around 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened or unfastened. You can switch off this display by pressing the 0.0 / SET button.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

WARNING

Unbuckled or badly buckled seat belts increase the risk of severe or even fatal injuries. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly.

Frontal collisions and the laws of physics

Fig. 37 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the vehicle oc- cupants are not wearing seat belts

Fig. 38 The vehicle hits the wall: the vehicle oc- cupants are not wearing seat belts

It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on collision: when a vehicle starts moving Fig. 37 it generates a certain amount of energy known as kinetic energy both in the vehicle and in the vehicle occupants.

The higher the speed and the greater the weight of the vehicle, the more energy there is to be absorbed in an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the kinetic energy is multiplied by four.

The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the greater the weight of the vehicle and the vehicle occupants, the more ener- gy there is to be absorbed in an accident.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. As a result, in a frontal collision they will continue to move forward at the speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact until something stops them! Because the vehicle occupants in our example are not restrain- ed by seat belts, all of the occupants' kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact Fig. 38.

59Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

At speeds of 30 km/h (18 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg or 2.205 pounds). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

Dangers of not using the seat belt

Fig. 39 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently

Fig. 40 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt

Many people believe that the vehicle occupants can protect themselves with their hands in a minor collision. This is false!

Even at low speeds, the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with just one's arms and hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted vehicle occupants are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 39.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags provide only additional protection. Airbags do not deploy in all types of ac- cident. All vehicle occupants (including the driver) must be wearing seat belts properly during the trip, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbag systems. This will reduce the risk of critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident regardless of whether an airbag is fitted for the seat.

The airbag is only deployed once. To achieve the best possible protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed. Vehicle occupants not wearing belts could be thrown from the vehicle and sustain even more severe or fa- tal injuries.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

60 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear pas- sengers who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the driver and other vehicle occupants Fig. 40.

Seat belt protection

Fig. 41 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown for- ward in the event of sud- den braking

Wearing a correctly fastened seat belt can significantly change the situa- tion. Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sit- ting positions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident. Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of being thrown from the car Fig. 41.

Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front crumple zones and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to ab- sorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the energy released and decrease the risk of injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when just driving around the corner. Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well.

Accident statistics have shown properly worn seat belts to be an effective means of considerably reducing the risk of severe injury and improving the chances of survival in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection provided by deployed airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fas- tened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that your pas- sengers have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!

Using seat belts

Checklist

Use of the seat belt :

Check the condition of all the seat belts at regular intervals.

Keep the seat belts clean.

Keep the belt web, the latch plate and the buckle free of foreign bod- ies and liquids.

Do not jam or damage the seat belt or the latch plate when closing the door, for example.

61Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Checklist (Continued)

Never remove, modify or repair the seat belt or belt fastening mecha- nisms.

Fasten your seat belt properly before each trip and keep it fastened.

Twisted seat belt

If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from the guide, the seat belt may have become twisted inside the side trim after being wound too quickly on unfastening:

Pull out the seat belt completely, carefully pulling on the latch plate.

Untwist the belt and guide it back, assisting it by hand.

The seat belt must be fastened even if it is impossible to untwist it. In this case, the twisted area must not be in an area in direct contact with your body. Have the seat belt untwisted urgently by a specialised workshop.

WARNING

An improperly handled seat belt increases the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

Regularly check that the seat belts and their components are in per- fect condition.

Always keep your seat belt clean.

Do not jam or damage the seat belt or rub it with sharp edges.

Make sure there are no liquids or foreign bodies on the latch plate and in the buckle.

Fastening or unfastening a seat belt

Fig. 42 Insert the latch plate into the buckle

Fig. 43 Release the latch plate from the buckle

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the position that most protects them in the event of an accident or sudden braking .

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

62 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Fastening the seat belt

Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

Correctly adjust the front seat page 47.

Engage the seat backrest in the upright position and correctly adjust the hear restraint .

Pull the latch plate and place the belt webbing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so .

Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the corresponding seat Fig. 42.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

Unfastening the seat belt

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a stand- still .

Press the red button on the buckle Fig. 43. The latch plate is released from the buckle.

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection unless the seat backrests are in an upright position and the seat belt is worn correctly, according to your size.

Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion can cause se- vere or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Seat belt position

Fig. 44 Correct seat belt position

63Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Fig. 45 Correct position- ing of seat belts during pregnancy

Seat belts offer their maximum protection in the event of an accident and reduce the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the optimum position to ensure the airbag provides the utmost protection. The seat belt must therefore al- ways be worn and the webbing correctly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even fatal injuries page 47, Adjusting the seat position.

Correct seat belt position

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the shoulder.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach.

The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably. Pull the belt tight if neces- sary to take up any slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt must lie evenly across the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach and must be worn properly at all times during the pregnancy Fig. 45.

Adapting the position of the belt webbing to your size

The seat belt can be adapted using the following equipment:

Seat height adjustment (front seats).

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking or manoeuvre.

The seat belt cannot provide optimum protection if it is not correctly worn and the seat backrest is not tilted slightly backwards.

The seat belt itself or a loose seat belt can cause severe injuries if the belt moves from hard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. the stomach).

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoul- der, never across the neck or the arm.

The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the torso

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis and always lie flat, surrounding the stomach.

Do not twist the seat belt while it is fastened.

Never pull the seat belt away from your body using your hand.

Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to al- ter the position of the belt webbing.

Note If you physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct posi- tion of the belt webbing, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices to ensure the optimum protection of the seat belt and air- bag. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

64 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Automatic belt retainer, belt tensioner, belt tension limiter

Seat belts are part of the vehicle safety concept page 65 and consist of the following important functions:

Automatic belt retainer

Every seat belt is equipped with an automatic belt retainer on the shoulder belt. If the belt is pulled slowly or during normal driving, the system allows for total freedom of movement on the shoulder belt. However, during sud- den braking, during travel in mountains or bends and during acceleration, the automatic belt retainer on the seat belt is locked is pulled quickly.

Belt tensioners

The seat belts for the occupants in the front seats are equipped with belt tensioners.

Sensors will trigger the belt tensioners during severe head-on, lateral and rear collisions and retract and tighten the seat belts. If the seat belt is loose, it is retracted to reduce the forwards movement of occupants or movement in the direction of the collision. The belt tensioner works in com- bination with the airbag system. The belt tensioner will not be triggered in the event of the vehicle overturning if the side airbags are not deployed.

If the belt tensioner is triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

Belt tension limiter

The belt tension limiter reduces the force of the seat belt on the body in the event of an accident.

Note The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. These requirements are known to specialised workshops page 64.

Service and disposal of belt tensioners

If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install other parts of the vehicle when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt tension- ers function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the belt tensioner is not reduced and that re- moved parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula- tions must be observed. These requirements are known to specialised work- shops.

WARNING

Improper handling and homemade repairs of seat belts, automatic belt retainers and tension devices increase the risk of sustaining severe or fa- tal injuries. The belt tensioner may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust or remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts. Any work must be performed by a specialised workshop only page 222.

Belt tensioners and automatic belt retainers cannot be repaired and must be replaced.

For the sake of the environment Airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal requirements for their disposal.

65Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Airbag system

Introduction

Front airbags have been installed for both driver and passenger. The front airbags can also protect the chest and head of driver and passenger if the seats, seat belts head restraints and, for the driver, the steering wheel are correctly adjusted and used. Airbags are considered as additional safety equipment. An airbag cannot replace the seat belt, which must be worn at all times, even in front seats where front airbags have been installed.

Additional information and warnings:

Driving tips page 25

Correct sitting position page 47

Seat belts page 56

Child seats (accessories) page 74

Care and cleaning of the vehicle interior page 205

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

Notes for the user page 233

WARNING

Never exclusively trust the airbag system as a means of protection.

Even when triggered, airbag protection is only auxiliary.

The airbags provide the best protection when the seat belts are prop- erly fastened, thus reducing the risk of sustaining injuries page 56, Seat belts.

Before each trip, every occupant must sit properly, correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to his or her seat and keeping it fastened throughout the trip. This rule is valid for all vehicle occupants.

WARNING

Occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any objects in the deployment space between them and the airbags, as this increa- ses the risk of sustaining injuries if the airbag is triggered. This modifies the airbag deployment space or the objects may fly uncontrollably and hit your body.

Never carry objects in your hand or on your lap while the vehicle is in motion.

Never transport objects on the front passenger seat. In the event of sudden braking and manoeuvres, the objects may end up in the airbag deployment space and fly uncontrollably around the interior if the airbag is activated.

Occupants of the front and rear seats must never carry any other peo- ple, pets or objects in the deployment space between them and the air- bags. Make sure children and other passengers also respect this recom- mendation.

WARNING

The airbag system provides protection for one accident only. If they have been deployed, they must be replaced.

Ensure deployed airbags and the system components involved are im- mediately replaced with new, SEAT-approved components for the vehicle.

Have any repairs or modifications carried out at a specialised work- shop. Specialised workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostics equipment, repair information and qualified personnel.

Never fit recycled or reused airbag components in your vehicle.

Never modify the airbag system components.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

66 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

WARNING

If the airbags are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

This fine dust may irritate the skin and eyes and cause breathing dif- ficulties, particularly in people suffering from or who have suffered from asthma or other illnesses of the respiratory tract. To reduce breathing dif- ficulties, get out of the vehicle and open and doors and windows to breath in fresh air.

Should you touch the dust, wash your hands and face using a mild soap and water before you eat.

Prevent the dust from affecting the eyes or open wounds.

Rinse your eyes with water if you have dust in them.

WARNING

Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbag modules to become porous. If an airbag is accidentally triggered, the detachment of plastic parts could cause serious injury.

Never clean the dash panel and the surfaces of the airbag modules with cleaners containing solvents.

67Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Types of front passenger front airbag systems

There are 2 different SEAT front passenger airbag systems:

A B

Characteristics of the passenger front airbag without disabling.

Characteristics of the front passen- ger front airbag that can be disabled manually page 71.

- * Control lamp on the instru- ment panel.

Control lamp on the instrument panel.

- Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

- PASSENGER AIR BAG control lamp on the dash panel.

- Key switch in the glove compart- ment on the front passenger side of the dash panel.

- Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

- Description: airbag system - Description: airbag system with front passenger front airbag disa- bling.

- Description: airbag system without disabling.*

Control lamps

Fig. 46 Control lamp for disabling the front pas- senger front airbag on the dash panel

lights up

Location Possible cause Solution

Instrument panel

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tension- ers.

Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

Dash panel.

Fault in the airbag system.

Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

Front passenger front airbag disabled.

Check whether the airbag should remain disabled.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG warning lamp does not remain lit or if it is lit together with the control lamp on the instrument panel and the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system .

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

68 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, the airbag may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly, leading to severe or fatal injuries.

Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialised work- shop.

Never mount a child seat in the front passenger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding de- scriptions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Description and function of the airbag

The airbag can protect vehicle occupants in the event of an accidents, cush- ioning the movement of the occupants in the direction of the collision in frontal and side accidents.

Deployed airbags fill with a propellant gas. This causes the airbag covers to break and the airbags to deploy extremely quickly in their entire deploy- ment space within fractions of a second. When an occupant with the seat belt properly fastened puts pressure on the inflated airbag, the propellant gas escapes to absorb the force of the impact and slow the movement. This reduces the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Airbag deployment does not mean that other types of injury such as swelling, bruising and skin injuries can be ruled out. Upon deployment of the airbag, friction can cause the generation of heat.

Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower part of the body.

The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact, the vehicle speed and the characteristics of the object the vehicle hits. Therefore, airbags are not triggered every time the vehicle is visibly damaged.

The activation of the airbag system depends on the magnitude of the decel- eration of the vehicle caused by a collision, which registers through an elec- tronic control unit. If the deceleration magnitude value is below the refer- ence value programmed in the control unit, the airbags will not deploy de- spite serious damage being caused to the vehicle by the accident. Damage suffered by the vehicle, reparation costs or absence of damage suffered from the accident are not indications of whether an airbag should have been deployed. Due to the varying nature of collision situations, it is impos- sible to define a speed range of the vehicle and reference values. For this reason, it is not possible to cover all types of collisions and collision angles resulting in the deployment of the airbag. Factors necessary for the airbag to be deployed can be, the characteristics of the object (hard or soft) against which the vehicle collides, the collision angle and the vehicle speed.

Airbags act in conjunction with three-point seat belts in the event of certain accidents, when the vehicle deceleration rate is severe enough to trigger the airbags. Airbags only deploy once and only under certain circumstan- ces. Seat belts remain present to offer protection in situations where air- bags are not triggered or where they have already deployed. For example, when a vehicle hits another after an initial collision or is hit by another vehi- cle.

The airbag system is an integral part of the car's passive safety system. The airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly page 47.

Vehicle safety components

The following safety equipment makes up the vehicle safety design to re- duce the risk of severe and fatal injuries. Depending on the vehicle equip- ment, some equipment may not be fitted in the vehicle or may not be avail- able in some markets.

69Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Optimised seat belts for all seats.

Seat belt tension devices for driver and passenger.

Seat belt force limiters for driver and passenger.

Seat belt warning lamp

Front airbags for driver and passenger.

Side airbags for driver and passenger.

Airbag control lamp .

Control units and sensors.

Head restraints optimised for rear-end collision.

Adjustable steering column.

If necessary, anchor points for child seats for the rear seats.

Where applicable, mountings for the child seat upper retaining strap.

Situations when the front and side airbags do not deploy:

If the ignition is switched off during the collision.

In frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit is too low.

In minor side collisions.

In rear collisions.

In the event of the vehicle overturning.

When the impact speed is lower than the reference value set in the con- trol unit.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

70 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Front airbags

Fig. 47 Location and deployment area of the front air- bag for the driver

Fig. 48 Location and deployment area of the front air- bag for the driver

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the driver and the front passenger additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision. Always remain as far away as possible from the front airbag page 47. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maximum protection.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Fig. 47 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Fig. 48. Air- bags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

71Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

When the front airbags are triggered they fill the zones marked in red Fig. 47 and Fig. 48 (radius of action). Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas , Factory-fitted accessories are outside the range of the front airbag for the driver and the front passen- ger, e.g. the baseplate for the mobile phone support.

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel Fig. 47 or dash panel Fig. 48 when the driver and front passenger airbags are triggered. The air- bag covers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

WARNING

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second.

Always keep the deployment areas of the front airbags vacant.

Never secure objects to the covers or in the deployment area of the airbag modules, e.g. drink holders or phone supports.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

Never fix any object to the windscreen above the front airbag on the front passenger side.

Do not alter, cover or stick anything to the steering wheel hub or the surface of the airbag module on the passenger side of the dash panel.

WARNING

Front airbags are deployed in front of the steering wheel Fig. 47 and the dash panel Fig. 48.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel on the outer edge of the ring with both hands: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position.

WARNING (Continued)

Adjust the driver seat so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between the centre of your chest and the hub of the steering wheel. If you physical constitution prevents you from meeting these re- quirements, make sure you contact a specialised workshop.

Adjust the front passenger seat so there is as much distance as possi- ble between the front passenger and the dash panel.

Deactivating and activating the front passenger front airbag using the key switch

Fig. 49 On front passen- ger side: key switch for disabling and enabling the front passenger front airbag

The front passenger front airbag must be disabled when a rear-facing child seat is mounted.

Disabling the front passenger front airbag

Switch the ignition off.

Open the door on the front passenger side.

Unfold the key shaft page 28.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

72 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Using the vehicle key, turn the key switch to OFF Fig. 49.

Close the door on the front passenger side.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG control lamp on the dash panel will re- main lit while the ignition is switched on page 67.

Activating the front passenger front airbag

Switch the ignition off.

Open the door on the front passenger side.

Unfold the key shaft page 28.

Using the vehicle key, turn the key switch to ON Fig. 49.

Close the door on the front passenger side.

Check that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF control lamp on the dash panel does not light up page 67 while the ignition is switched on.

How to know whether the front passenger front airbag is disabled

Disabling of the front passenger airbag is only indicated by the PASSENGER AIR BAG control lamp that remains lit on the dash panel ( re- mains yellow) page 67.

If the control lamp on the dash panel does not remain lit or is lit in combination with the control lamp on the instrument panel, a child re- straint system cannot be mounted on the front passenger seat for safety reasons. The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident.

WARNING

The front passenger front airbag must only be disabled in special cases.

Disable and activate the front passenger front airbag when the igni- tion is switched off to avoid damage to the airbag system.

It is the driver's responsibility to ensure that the key operated switch is set to the correct position.

WARNING (Continued)

Only disable the front passenger front airbag when a child seat is to be mounted under exceptional circumstances.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, reconnect the front passenger front airbag.

73Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Side airbags

Fig. 50 On the side of the front seat: location of the side airbag

Fig. 51 On the left side of the vehicle: deploy- ment area of side airbag

The side airbags are located in the outer cushion of the driver and front pas- senger seat backrests Fig. 50. Their position is indicated by the word AIRBAG. The area marked in red Fig. 51 indicates the side airbag de- ployment zone.

In the event of a side-on collision, the side airbag will deploy in the side of the vehicle affected Fig. 51, thus reducing the risk of injuries to passen- gers on the side of the body and the head facing the accident side.

WARNING

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second.

Always keep the deployment areas of the side airbags vacant.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

Do not mount accessories on the doors.

Only used protective covers for the seats that are approved for the ve- hicle. Otherwise, the side airbag would be obstructed when deployed.

WARNING

Incorrect handling of the driver's and front passenger seat could prevent the side airbag from deploying properly and cause severe injuries.

Never remove the front seats of the vehicle or modify any of their components.

Great forces must not be exerted on the seat backrest bolsters be- cause the side airbags might not deploy correctly, might not deploy at all or might deploy unexpectedly.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

74 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Child seats (accessories)

Introduction

Before transporting babies and children in a child seat placed in the front passenger seat, first completely read the information regarding the airbag system.

This information is extremely important for driver and passenger safety, par- ticularly that of babies and children.

SEAT recommends the use of child seats from the SEAT accessory pro- gramme. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can purchase child seats with different mountings from a SEAT dealership.

Additional information and warnings:

Seat belts page 56

Airbag system page 65

WARNING

Make sure children are properly belted in and correctly secured to avoid severe or fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion.

Never use a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat if the front passenger front airbag is enabled.

Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

Children must always be protected with an approved child restraint system suited to their height and weight.

Children must assume the proper sitting position and be properly bel- ted in while travelling.

WARNING (Continued)

Ensure the seat backrest is upright when a child seat is being used on it.

Do not allow the child's head or other part of his or her body to enter the deployment area of the side airbags.

Make sure the belt webbing is correctly positioned.

Never hold children or babies on your lap or in your arms.

Only one child may occupy a child seat.

Please read and observe the child seat manufacturer's handling in- structions.

WARNING

An empty or loose child seat could fly uncontrollably around the vehicle interior and cause injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

When not in use while the vehicle is in motion, always safely secure the child seat or store it in the luggage compartment.

Note Replace the child seat after an accident, as it may have invisible damage.

75Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

General information on transporting children in the vehicle

Legal regulations and provisions will always take priority over the descrip- tions of this instruction manual. There are different regulations and provi- sions for the use of child seats and their mountings (table on page 75). In some countries, for example, the use of child seats on certain seats in the vehicle may be forbidden.

The physical principles and the forces acting on the vehicle in the event of a collision or other type of accidents also apply to children page 56. Howev- er, unlike adults and youngsters, children do not have fully developed mus- cle and bone structures. In the event of an accident, children are subject to a greater risk than adults of sustaining severe injuries.

Given that children's bodies are not yet fully developed, child restraint sys- tems must be used that are especially adapted to their height, weight and constitution. There are laws in force in many countries that determine the use of approved seat systems for transporting babies and children.

Only used authorised, approved child seats that are suitable for the vehicle. Always consult with a SEAT dealership or a Specialised workshop should you have any doubts.

Checklist

To transport children in the vehicle :

Observe the legal requirements specific to each country.

For safety reasons, SEAT recommends that children under 12 years of age are transported on the rear seats.

Only if you have no alternative should a child travel on the front pas- senger seat page 77. The safest place in the vehicle is on the rear seat behind the front passenger seat.

Child must always use a child restraint system when travelling in the vehicle. The child restraint system must be suitable for the height, weight and constitution of the child.

Only one child may occupy a child seat.

Follow the user instructions from the child seat manufacturer and al- ways keep them in the vehicle.

If the child seat is secured using the seat belt, guide the seat belt through or around the child seat according to the instructions of the child seat manufacturer.

Make sure the belt webbing is correctly positioned and that the child is sitting properly.

The child seat should be installed on the rear seat behind the front passenger seat so that the child can exit the car on the kerb side.

Do not leave toys or other loose objects on the child seat or on the seat while the vehicle is in motion.

Specific child seat regulations for each country (selection)

Child seats must comply with the ECE-R 441) regulation. You can consult ad- ditional information at your SEAT dealership at the internet address www.seat.es.

Categorisation of child seats according to ECE-R 44

Weight category Weight of the child Age

Group 0 up to 10 kg up to approximately. 9 months

Group 0+ up to 13 kg up to approximately. 18

months

Group 1 9 to 18 kg approx. 8 months to 31/2

years

Group 2 15 to 25 kg approx. 3 to 7 years

Group 3 22 to 36 kg approx. 6 to 12 years

Not all children fit in the seat of their weight group. Nor do all seats adapt to the vehicle. Therefore, always check whether the child fits properly in the child seat and whether the seat can be installed safely in the vehicle.

1) ECE-R: Economic Comission for Europe Regulation.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

76 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Child seats approved under the ECE-R 44 regulation are fitted with the corre- sponding approval symbol. The sign is an upper-case E in a circle with the identification number below it.

WARNING

Not following the checklist prepared for your own safety could lead to ac- cidents and severe injuries.

Always follow the check list and perform the necessary operations.

WARNING

In general, the rear seat is always the safest place for children, who are belted correctly, in the event of an accident.

A suitable child seat that is correctly installed and used on one of the rear seats offer the most protection possible for babies and children up to 12 years in most accidents.

Different mounting systems

Fig. 52 On the rear seats: figure A shows the basic child restraint system mounting using lower retaining rings and the upper retaining strap figure B shows the child re- straint system mounting using the vehicle seat belt

Always secure child seats properly and safely in the vehicle according to the child seat manufacturer's installation instructions.

Mounted child seats must rest correctly on the vehicle's seat and must not move or rock more than 2.5 cm.

Child seats equipped for a Top Tether strap must also be secured using the Top Tether retaining strap in the vehicle page 81. Only attach the retain- ing strap to the corresponding retaining rings. Not all rings can be used with the Top Tether system. Always tighten the Top Tether retaining strap so that the child seat fits snugly against the corresponding seat in the vehicle.

77Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Specific mounting systems for each country

Attachment variants Fig. 52:

Europe: ISOFIX retaining rings and upper retaining strap page 79 and page 81.

Three-point seat belt and upper retaining strap page 78.

The systems include the child restraint system mounting with an upper re- taining strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on the seat.

Use of the child seat on the front passenger seat

Transporting children on the front passenger seat is not permitted in all countries. Furthermore, not all child seats are approved for use on the front passenger seat. Your SEAT dealership has an updated list of all approved child seats. Only used child seats that are approved for each vehicle.

The front airbag on the front passenger side is highly dangerous for a child. The front passenger seat is life-threatening to a child if he or she is trans- ported in a rear-facing child seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating front airbag can strike it with such great force that severe or fatal injuries may result . Therefore, rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front passenger seat when the front passenger front airbag is enabled.

Only use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the front pas- senger front airbag is disabled. When it is disabled, the yellow PASSENGER AIR BAG page 65 control lamp on the dash panel will be lit. If you cannot disable the front passenger front airbag and it remains activated, it is forbidden to transport children on the front passenger seat .

A

B

Things to note if using a child seat on the front passenger seat:

The front passenger front airbag must be disabled when using a rear- facing child seat page 65.

The seat backrest of the front passenger seat must be upright.

The front passenger seat must be moved as far back as possible.

The seat backrest of the front passenger seat must be upright.

Suitable child seats

The child seat must be authorised by the manufacturer especially for use on a front passenger seat with a front or side airbag.

Universal seats for children can be fitted in the front passenger seat, in groups 0, 0+, 1, 2 or 3 according to the ECE-R 44 regulation.

WARNING

If a child seat is mounted on the front passenger seat, the risk of the child sustaining severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increa- ses. Rear-facing child seats must never be mounted on the front passen- ger seat when the front passenger front airbag is enabled. This is life- threatening to the child should the front airbag deploy, as the child seat would be struck by the inflated airbag and thrown against the seat back- rest.

WARNING

If, in exceptional circumstances, a child must be transported in a rear-fac- ing child seat on the front passenger seat, strictly observe the following:

Always disable the front passenger front airbag and leave it disabled.

The child seat must be approved by the manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with front and side airbag.

Follow the installation instructions of the child seat manufacturer and observe the warnings.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

78 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

WARNING (Continued)

Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust it to its highest position to keep as far away as possible from the front airbag.

Move the seat backrest to the upright position.

Children must always be protected with an approved child restraint system suited to their height and weight.

Use of the child seat on the rear seat

If a child seat is mounted on the rear seat, adapt the position of the front passenger seat so that the child has enough space. Therefore, adapt the front passenger seat to the size of the child seat and the height of the child. Ensure the passenger is in the correct position page 47.

Suitable child seats

The manufacturer must authorise the child seat for use in the rear seats with side airbags.

Universal seats for children can be fitted in the passenger seat, in groups 0, 0+, 1, 2 or 3 according to the ECE-R 44 regulation.

The rear seats are suitable for child seats with the ISOFIX system specially designed for this type of vehicle in accordance with regulation ECE-R 44.

ISOFIX child seats approved for rear seats

ISOFIX child seats are divided into certified categories universal, semi- universal or specific categories for the vehicle.

If the ISOFIX child seat is certified universal, it must be supported by the lower anchor points and the Top Tether retaining strap.

If the ISOFIX child seat is certified semi-universal or specific catego- ries for the vehicle, check that the child seat is certified for the vehicle be- fore employing it. The child seat manufacturer supplies, in addition to the ISOFIX child seat, a list of vehicles for which the corresponding ISOFIX child

seat has been certified. If necessary, contact the child seat manufacturer for an updated list of vehicles.

Securing child seats with the seat belt

The seat belt may be used to secure child seats with the universal marking (on the orange label) to the vehicle seats marked with a u in the table be- low.

Category Front passenger Rear seats

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

u u

Category 0+ Up to 13 kg

u u

Group 1 9 to 18 kg

u u

Group 2 15 to 25 kg

u u

Group 3 22 to 36 kg

u u

Securing the child seat using the seat belt

Please read and observe the child seat manufacturer's handling instruc- tions.

Move the front passenger seat, or the rear seat bench back as far as pos- sible and, in the case of an adjustable backrest, set it in the upright posi- tion page 47.

Positioning the child seat on the seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Fasten the seat belt or pass it around the child seat structure in the man- ner described in the manufacturer's instructions.

Make sure the seat belt is not twisted.

79Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click.

Ensure that the upper belt web lies tightly on the child seat.

Pull the belt (it must be no longer possible to pull the lower belt web- bing out).

Removing the child seat

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a stand- still .

Press the red button on the buckle. The latch plate is released from the buckle.

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

Remove the child seat from the vehicle.

WARNING

Unbuckling the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a standstill.

Securing the child seat using the lower anchor points (ISOFIX, LATCH)

Fig. 53 On the vehicle seat: Identification var- iants of the anchor points for the child seats

Each seat of the rear seat bench has two retainers named lower anchor points.

Overview of ISOFIX installation

In compliance with the European directive ECE 16, The following table de- tails the installation possibilities for ISOFIX child seats with the lower an- chor points in each of the vehicle seats.

The allowed body weight for the child seat or information regarding size A to G is indicated on the label on the child seat with certification universal or semi-universal.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

80 Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Group (weight category)

Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0: up to 10 kg

Group 1: 9 to 18 kg Group 0+: up to 13 kg

Installation direction facing backwards

(in the direction oppo- site to travel)

facing backwards (in the direction opposite to trav-

el)

facing backwards (in the direction oppo-

site to travel)

facing forwards (in the direction of travel)

Size F G C D E C D A B B1

installed on front passenger seat Seat does not have anchor points, it is not possible to secure with ISOFIX/LATCH

Installed on the rear seat bench IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

IL-SU: seat suitable for installing an ISOFIX child seat with certification semi-universal, take note of the list of vehicles of the manufacturer of the child seat.

IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with certifica- tion universal and with Top Tether retaining strap.

Child seats with rigid mounting

For the installation of a child seat with rigid mounting auxiliary introduction elements can be used. Using auxiliary introduction elements facilitates in- stallation and protects upholstery. Auxiliary introduction elements form part of the supply volume of the child seat or can be acquired at a SEAT dealer- ship. If necessary, auxiliary introduction elements are inserted in both an- chor points of the vehicle .

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when installing and removing the child seat .

Press the child seat onto the retaining rings Fig. 53 in the direction of the arrow. The child seat must be safely engaged and click audibly into place.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.

Child seat with adjustable retaining straps

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when installing and removing the child seat .

Place the child seat on the seat cushion and attach the retaining strap hooks to the retaining rings Fig. 53.

Tighten the straps evenly using the corresponding adjustment device. The child seat must sit flush against the vehicle seat.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.

WARNING

The lower anchor points for child seats do not include rings. Only secure booster seats to lower anchor points.

CAUTION To avoid making permanent marks in the padding, remove the auxiliary introduction elements from the anchor points when the child seat is not in- stalled in the vehicle anchor points.

To prevent damage being done to the upholstery, the padding or the auxiliary introduction elements, always remove the auxiliary introduction el- ements from the anchor points before folding the rear seat bench.

81Ensuring you are correctly and safely seated

Securing a child seat using a Top Tether retaining strap

Fig. 54 Example of an upper retaining strap connected.

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when installing and removing the child seat .

Unlock the seat backrest and fold it gently forward page 54.

Remove the head restraints situated behind the child seat and store them safely in the vehicle page 47.

Guide the upper retaining strap from of the child seat back to the lug- gage compartment, feeding it through the seat backrest and the rear shelf.

Fold back the seat backrest and push it firmly into the lock.

Secure the child seat to the lower anchor points page 79

Hook the upper retaining strap in the luggage compartment, to the cor- responding retaining ring Fig. 54.

Tighten the strap so that the top of the child seat rests on the seat back- rest.

WARNING

Child seats with lower anchor points and with an upper retaining strap must be installed in line with the manufacturer's instructions. Failure to comply could result in severe injuries.

Always secure just one retaining strap to a child seat with the lug- gage compartment retaining ring.

Always use the correct retaining rings for the retaining strap.

Never secure the retaining strap to a retainer.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

82 Lights and visibility

Lights and visibility

Lights

Introduction

The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be observed.

The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all situations.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

SEAT information system page 22

Changing bulbs page 266

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and the main beam is not used correct- ly, there is a risk of dazzling or distracting other road users. This could result in a serious accident.

Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.

Never use the main beam or flashed headlamps as this could dazzle other drivers.

Control lamps

lights up Possible cause Solution

Rear fog light switched on. page 84.

Fog lights switched on page 84.

Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a vehicle turn sig- nal is faulty.

If necessary, check the vehicle lighting.

Main beam on or flasher on. page 83.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

Park the vehicle at a suitable distance away from the traffic ensuring that the exhaust system is not in contact with inflammable material, for example, dry grass, fuel, oil, etc.

A faulty vehicle represents a risk of accident for the driver and for oth- er road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers.

83Lights and visibility

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Turn signal and headlight lever

Fig. 55 Turn signal and main beam lever in their initial position

Move the lever to the required position:

Right turn signal.

Left turn signal.

Switching on main beam . When the main beam is switched on, the warning lamp is switched on in the instrument panel.

Switch on the flasher or switch off the main beam headlights. The flash- ed beam comes on if the lever is pressed. The warning lamp will light up during this process.

1

2

3

4

Push the lever all the way down to turn off the corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals

For the convenience turn signals, move the lever as far as possible upwards or downwards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash 3 times.

The convenience indicators can be deactivated at a Specialised workshop.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the headlights may cause accidents and serious injury, as the main beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note The turn signal only works when the ignition is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off page 241.

Note If any of both turn signals fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice faster than normal.

Note The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

84 Lights and visibility

Turning on and off lights

Fig. 56 Next to the steering wheel: diagram of some of the types of light switch

The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be observed.

Turn the light switch to the required position Fig. 56:

if the ignition is switched off when the ignition is on

Fog lights, dipped beam and side lights off.

Lights off, daytime driving light on.

Side light on. Side light on.

Dipped beam off; if necessary, the side light comes on for a time.

Dipped beam switched on.

Fog lights*

The control lamp appears on the fog lights control connected.

Switching on the fog lights : Turn the switch to position or pull out to the first stop.

Switching on the rear fog light : turn the light switch to position o pull out to the maximum.

To switch off the fog lights, press the light switch or turn it to position .

Audible warnings to advise the driver that the lights have not been switched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driver door is open, an audible warn- ing signal is heard in the following cases: This is a reminder to turn off the lights.

When the light switch is in position .

When the light switch is in position .

85Lights and visibility

WARNING

The side lights or daytime driving lights are not bright enough to illumi- nate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you.

Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

Lights and visibility: functions

Parking light remains on both sides

If when switching off the ignition, the light control remains in the posi- tion and the vehicle is closed from outside, both headlights, in addition to the side lights and the rear lights will light up.

Daytime driving light

The daytime driving light consists of individual lights in the front head- lamps.

When the daytime driving light is switched on, only the individual lights come on .

The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the light switch is in position .

Switching the daytime driving light on and off

To switch the daytime driving light on or off, it is necessary to fit or remove the corresponding fuse. Ask for professional assistance for this.

WARNING

If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle is not clearly visible to other drivers, there is a risk of accident.

Never use the daytime driving light if the road is not well-lit as a re- sult of the weather conditions and poor visibility. The daytime driving lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you.

The rear lights do not come on with the daytime driving light. A vehi- cle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the darkness, if it is raining or in conditions of poor visibility.

Note The headlights, rear lights and turn signals may mist up temporarily on the inside in cool or damp weather. This is normal and in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle lighting system.

Adjusting the headlights

In those countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road to the home country, the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers of oncom- ing vehicles.

For this reason, stickers may need to be used to cover the headlights when driving abroad. For further information, please refer to a specialised work- shop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Note The use of stickers to cover headlights is only permitted over a short period. To modify the direction of the headlamps more permanently, please take the vehicle to a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Techni- cal Service.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

86 Lights and visibility

Headlight range control, lighting of instruments and controls

Fig. 57 Next to the steering wheel: Head- light range control

Headlamp height adjustment

The headlight range control Fig. 57 is modified according to the value of the headlight beam and the vehicle load status. This offers the driver opti- mum visibility and the headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers .

The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch Fig. 57:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compartment empty

1 All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty

2 All seats occupied, luggage compartment full

3 Driver only, luggage compartment full

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

Instrument and switch lighting

When the side lights or dipped beam headlights are switched on, the light- ing for instruments and controls lights up at a constant brightness.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that the headlights dazzle and distract other drivers. This could result in a serious accident.

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load status so that it does not blind other drivers.

Reading light

Button/ Switch

effect

Switching off the reading light.

Switching on the reading light.

Switches door contact control on (central position). The reading light comes on automatically when the vehicle is un- locked, a door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition. The light goes off a few seconds after all the doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the ignition is switched on.

Note The reading lights go out when the vehicle is locked, or a few minutes after the key is removed from the ignition. This prevents the battery from dis- charging.

87Lights and visibility

Sun blind

Introduction

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

Always roll or fold sun blinds and visors away when not in use.

Sun visors

Fig. 58 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front passenger sun visors:

Lower by unfolding towards the windscreen.

The sun visor can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards the door.

Swing the sun visor towards the door, longitudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror*

There may be a vanity mirror in the folded sun visor on the passenger side and a cardholder in the driver sun visor.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

88 Lights and visibility

Heat-insulating glass windscreen

Fig. 59 Windscreen with reflective infrared and metal coating and small window (red surface)

The heat-insulating windscreens include a reflective infrared coating. The section above the rear vision mirror has been left uncoated (communication window) to allow electric components from the accessories shop to operate correctly Fig. 59.

CAUTION When the uncoated surface is covered or has a sticker on the interior or ex- terior, malfunctions in the electronic components may occur. Never cover the uncoated surface on the interior or exterior.

89Lights and visibility

Windscreen wiper and washer

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Air recirculation mode page 164

Working in the engine compartment page 180

Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior page 197

WARNING

Water from the windscreen washer water bottle may freeze on the wind- screen if it does not contain enough anti-freeze, reducing forward visibili- ty.

In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough anti-freeze.

In cold conditions, you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the ventilation system. The anti- freeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of acci- dent and serious injury.

Always replace damaged or worn blades or blades which do not clean the windscreen correctly.

CAUTION In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before using the wipers for the first time. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in service position page 91.

Window wiper lever

Fig. 60 Using the wind- screen wipers

Fig. 61 Using the rear window wipers

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

90 Lights and visibility

Move the lever to the required position :

0 Windscreen wiper off.

1 Windscreen interval wipe.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Brief wipe - short wipe. Hold the lever down for more time to increase the wipe frequency.

5 Automatic wipe for cleaning windscreens with the lever up.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper will clean the win- dow approximately every 6 seconds.

7 Automatic wipe for cleaning rear windows with the lever pressed.

CAUTION If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are on, the wind- screen wipers carry on wiping at the same level when the ignition is switch- ed back on. Ice, snow and other obstacles may damage the windscreen wip- er and the wiper motor.

If necessary, remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before starting your journey.

Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wipers from the glass. SEAT recom- mends a de-icer spray for this operation.

Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.

Note The interval wipe speed varies according to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is moving, the more often the windscreen is cleaned.

Note The rear wiper is automatically switched on when the windscreen wiper is on and the car is in reverse gear.

Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wiper performance in different situations:

If the vehicle is at a stand- still:

The activated position provisionally changes to the previous position.

For the interval wipe: The intervals between wipes vary according to the speed of the vehicle. The higher the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals.

Note The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the ob- stacle and switch the wiper back on again.

91Lights and visibility

Windscreen wiper service position

Fig. 62 Wipers in service position

The wiper arms can be raised when the wipers are in service position Fig. 62. To place the windscreen wipers in the service position, proceed as follows:

The bonnet must be closed page 180.

Switch the ignition on and off.

Press the windscreen wiper lever downwards briefly Fig. 60 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. When the ignition is switched on, the windscreen wiper arms return to their initial position upon activating the windscreen wiper lever.

Lifting and returning windscreen wiper arms

Place the wiper arms in the service position .

Only hold the wiper arms at the point where the blade is fixed.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, only leave them in the service position.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

Checking and topping up the windscreen washer reservoir with water

Fig. 63 In the engine compartment: wind- screen washer reservoir top

Check the water level in the windscreen washer reservoir regularly and top up as required.

Open the bonnet page 180.

The washer reservoir is marked with the symbol on the lid Fig. 63.

Check there is enough water in the reservoir.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

92 Lights and visibility

To top up, mix water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT . Please follow the instructions for use found on the packaging.

In cold weather, a special antifreeze should also be added to prevent the water from freezing .

Reservoir capacity

The washer bottle capacity is approximately. 3 litres.

WARNING

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other similar additives with the windscreen washer water. A greasy layer may be formed on the wind- screen which will impair visibility.

Use clean water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT.

If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION Do not mix cleaning products recommended by SEAT with other prod- ucts. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen washer jets.

When topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!

93Lights and visibility

Rear vision mirror

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Braking, stopping and parking page 134

Rear vision mirror

Fig. 64 Manual anti-daz- zle function for rear vi- sion mirror

The driver should always adjust the rear vision mirror to permit adequate visibility through the rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rear vision mirror

Basic position: point the lever at the bottom of the mirror forwards.

Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function Fig. 64.

Exterior mirrors

Fig. 65 In the front doors: button to adjust the mechanical exterior rear vision mirror

Fig. 66 In the driver door: rotary control for the exterior electric mir- rors

Adjust the exterior mirrors by pressing the adjust button Fig. 65 or the rotary control* Fig. 66.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

94 Lights and visibility

Turn the rotary control Fig. 66 to the required position:

Switch on the exterior mirror heating

Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror by turning the knob for- wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.

Zero position. Exterior mirror heating switched off, it is not possible to adjust the exterior mirrors.

Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror by turning the knob for- wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.

Folding in the exterior mirrors and returning them to their original position is possible through a mechanical system. Carefully fold the exterior rear vi- sion mirror casing towards the side window or pull it away from the window until it clicks into place.

WARNING

Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking care to avoid injuries.

Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror when there is no-one in the way of the mirror.

When moving the mirror, take care not to trap fingers between the mirror and the mirror bracket.

WARNING

Failure to correctly estimate the distance of the vehicle behind could lead to serious accident.

Rear-view convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision, how- ever objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors.

The use of these mirrors to estimate the distance to the next vehicle when changing lane is imprecise and could result in serious accident.

If possible, use the rear vision mirror to estimate distances to vehi- cles behind you or in other circumstances.

Make sure that the rear visibility is adequate.

For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer nee- ded. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note In the event of faults, the electric exterior mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing the edge of the mirror surface.

95Transporting

Transporting

Driving tips

Introduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggage compartment and place the seat backs in a vertical position. Never overload the vehicle. Both the carry- ing capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have ef- fects on the driving behaviour and braking ability .

Additional information and warnings:

Rear lid page 39

To lower the front passenger seat back page 54

Light page 82

Luggage compartment page 98

Roof carrier page 104

Wheels and tyres page 210

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects can cause serious injury in case of a sudden manoeuvring or breaking or in case of an accident. This is es- pecially true when objects are struck by a detonating airbag and fired through the vehicle interior. To reduce the risks, please note the follow- ing:

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always keep equipment and heavy objects in the luggage compartment.

WARNING (Continued)

Always secure objects with suitable rope or slings so that they cannot enter the deployment areas around the frontal or side airbags in case of sudden braking or an accident.

Always ensure that objects inside the vehicle cannot move into the deployment area of the bags while driving.

While driving, always keep object compartments closed.

Remove all objects from the front passenger seat when this is fol- lowed down. When the seat backrest is folded down, it presses on small and light objects and these are detected by the weight sensor on the seat; this sends false information to the airbag control unit.

While the backrest of the front passenger seat is folded, the frontal airbag must remain disconnected and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF light on.

Objects secured in the vehicle should never be placed in such a way as to make passengers sit in an incorrect position.

If secured objects occupy a seat then this should not be occupied or used by anybody.

WARNING

The driving behaviour and braking ability change when transporting heavy and large objects.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

Accelerate gently and carefully.

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

Brake early.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

96 Transporting

Transporting a load

Secure all objects in the vehicle

Distribute the load throughout the vehicle and on the roof as uniformly as possible.

Transport heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage com- partment and lock the seat backs in the vertical position.

Check the headlight adjustment page 82.

Use the suitable tyre pressure according to the load being transported. Read the tire inflation information label page 210.

CAUTION Objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the heated rear window and cause damage.

Note Please refer to the notes on loading the roof carrier page 104.

Driving with the rear lid open

Driving with the rear lid open creates an additional risk. Secure all objects and secure the rear lid correctly and take all measures possible to reduce toxic gases from entering the vehicle.

WARNING

Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open could cause serious injuries.

Always drive with the rear lid closed.

WARNING (Continued)

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Loose items could fall out of the ve- hicle and injure other road users or damage other vehicles.

Drive particularly carefully and think ahead.

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking given that this could cause an uncontrolled movement of the open rear lid.

When transporting objects that protrude out of the luggage compart- ment, indicate them suitably. Observe legal requirements.

If objects must project out of the luggage compartment, the rear lid must never be used to secure or attach objects.

If a baggage rack is fitted on the rear lid, it should be removed before travelling with the rear lid open.

WARNING

Toxic gases may enter the vehicle interior when the rear lid is open. This could cause loss of consciousness, carbon monoxide poisoning, serious injury and accidents.

To avoid toxic gases entering the vehicle always drive with the rear lid closed.

In exceptional circumstances, if you must drive with the rear lid open, observe the following to reduce the entry of toxic gases inside the vehi- cle:

Close all windows.

Disable air recirculation mode.

Open all of the air outlets on the instrument panel.

Switch on the blower to maximum.

CAUTION An open rear lid changes the length and height of the vehicle.

97Transporting

Driving a loaded vehicle

For the best handling when driving a loaded vehicle, note the following:

Secure all objects page 96.

Accelerate gently and carefully.

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

Brake early.

If necessary, read the instructions for driving with a roof carrier system page 104.

WARNING

A sliding load could considerably affect the stability and safety of the ve- hicle resulting in an accident with serious consequences.

Secure loads correctly so they do not move.

When transporting heavy objects, use suitable ropes or straps.

Lock the seat backs in vertical position.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

98 Transporting

Loading luggage compartment

Introduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggage compartment and place the seat backs in a vertical position. Never overload the vehicle. Both the carry- ing capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have ef- fects on the driving behaviour and braking ability .

Additional information and warnings:

Airbag system page 65

Light page 82

Transporting page 95

Wheels and tyres page 210

WARNING

When the vehicle is not in use or being watched, always lock the doors and the rear lid to reduce the risk of serious injury or death.

Do not leave children unwatched, especially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, close the rear lid from inside and be unable to escape themselves. This could lead to seri- ous injury or death.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle.

Never transport people in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects can cause serious injury in case of a sudden manoeuvring or breaking or in case of an accident. This is es- pecially true when objects are struck by a detonating airbag and fired through the vehicle interior. To reduce the risks, please note the follow- ing:

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always keep equipment and heavy objects in the luggage compartment.

Always secure objects with suitable rope or straps so that they can- not enter the deployment areas around the frontal or side airbags in case of sudden braking or an accident.

While driving, always keep object compartments closed.

Do not place hard, heavy or sharp objects inside the vehicle interior, in open storage compartments, the rear shelf or on the dash panel.

Remove hard, heavy and sharp objects from clothes and pockets in- side the vehicle and store securely.

WARNING

The transport of heavy object changes vehicle handling and increases braking distance. Heavy loads that have not been stored or secured cor- rectly could cause loss of control and result in serious injury.

The vehicle handling changes when transporting heavy objects due to a change in the centre of gravity.

Distribute the load as uniformly and as low down on the vehicle as possible.

Store heavy objects in the luggage compartment as far from the rear axle as possible.

CAUTION Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the heated rear window and cause damage.

99Transporting

Note The ventilating slits between the heated rear window and the rear shelf must not be covered so that used air can escape from the vehicle.

Folding and lifting up the rear seat bench backrest

Fig. 67 Rear seat: unlock button A ; red marking B

The rear seat backrest can be folded forward to extend the luggage com- partment.

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

Push the head restraint down as far as it will go or remove it if necessary page 47 and store it in a safe place.

Pull the unlock switch Fig. 67 A forwards whilst simultaneously lift- ing the rear seat backrest.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the but- ton B is visible.

If the rear seat backrest is folded, people (including children) are not permitted to travel in the rear folded seats.

Folding up the rear seat backrest

Lift back the backrest of the rear seat and push it firmly into the lock un- til it clicks securely into place .

The red marking on the unlock button B must not be seen.

Make sure that the backrest of the rear seat is securely locked in posi- tion so that the seat belts can provide proper protection in the rear seats.

If necessary, install and adjust the head restraints again page 47.

WARNING

Folding and lifting the backrests of the rear seats carelessly without pay- ing attention could cause serious injury.

Never fold or lift the seats while driving.

Do no trap or damage seat belts when raising the seat backrest.

Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbs away from the range of the rear seat backrests when folding and lifting them.

All seat backrests must engage correctly for the seat belts on the rear seats to work properly. When the backrest of an occupied seat is not cor- rectly locked in place, the passenger can be thrust forward with the rear seat backrest in case of sudden braking, sudden manoeuvres or an acci- dent.

A red signal on the button B warns that the backrest is not engaged. Always check that the red marking is not visible when the backrest of the rear seat is in the upright position.

No seat must be occupied if the backrest of the rear seat is folded or not correctly engaged.

CAUTION Before folding the seat backrest of the rear seat, adjust the front seats so that the head restraint or seat backrest do not hit them when it is folded. If necessary, remove the head restraints page 47 and store them safely.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

100 Transporting

Rear shelf*

Fig. 68 In the luggage compartment: removing and installing the rear shelf

You may put light items of clothing on the rear shelf. Check that the rear view is not limited.

Lifting up the rear shelf

Lift up the rear shelf and secure it into the side locks Fig. 68 1 . Check that it is correctly engaged. To lower the rear shelf, press it until it is re- leased from the locks.

Removing the shelf

Pull the rear shelf upwards, removing it from the side supports 2 .

Lifting up the rear shelf

Press the rear shelf downwards into the side supports 2 .

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects or animals on the rear shelf could cause serious injuries in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking or even an accident.

Do not leave hard, heavy or sharp objects (loose or in bags) on the rear shelf.

Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

Never drive with the rear shelf raised. Always lower it or remove it be- fore the journey.

CAUTION To prevent the rear shelf from being damaged:

Always check that the rear shelf is firmly engaged into the side supports.

Regulate the height of the load in the luggage compartment to ensure the rear shelf does not press down on the load with the rear lid closed.

101Transporting

Luggage compartment variable floor

Fig. 69 A: Open the luggage compartment varia- ble floor. B: raised luggage compartment variable floor.

Fig. 70 C: extending the luggage compartment downwards D: extending the luggage compart- ment forwards.

Raising and lowering the luggage compartment floor

To raise the floor, raise handle Fig. 69 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull from the floor upwards Fig. 69 .

To lower it, guide the floor downwards.

Extending the luggage compartment downwards

Raise the luggage compartment floor and push it downwards in the rail Fig. 70 (arrows)

Place the variable floor over the floor lining.

If necessary, fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards page 99.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

102 Transporting

Extending the luggage compartment forwards

Disassemble the luggage compartment tray page 100.

Disassemble the rear headrests page 47.

Fold the backrest of the rear seat forwards page 99.

If necessary, expand the luggage compartment downwards.

CAUTION Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always care- fully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

In the front part of the luggage compartment, there may be fastening rings to secure the luggage.

In order to use the fastening rings, they must be lifted beforehand.

WARNING

If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be launched across the passenger compartment and cause serious or fatal injuries.

It is important to always use belts or retaining straps that are suita- ble and in a good condition.

Belts and retaining straps should be securely fastened to the fasten- ing rings.

Objects in the luggage compartment that are unsecured could move suddenly and modify the handling of the vehicle.

WARNING (Continued)

Small and light objects must also be secured.

The maximum tensile load of the fastening ring for securing objects should never be exceeded.

A child seat should never be secured with the fastening rings.

Note The maximum tensile load that the fastening rings can support is 3.5 kN.

Belts and securing systems for the appropriate load can be obtained from specialised dealerships. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Retaining hooks

Fig. 71 In the luggage compartment: retaining hooks

There may be hooks in the upper left and right part of the luggage compart- ment.

103Transporting

WARNING

Never use these hooks to secure objects. In case of sudden braking or an accident, the hooks could rupture.

CAUTION The hooks can support a maximum of 2.5 kg individually.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

104 Transporting

Roof carrier system

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to optimise aerodynamics. For this rea- son, conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the water drains.

Given that the water drains have been incorporated into the roof for aerody- namic reasons, only the SEAT approved basic supports and roof carrier sys- tems can be used.

When the roof carrier system should be removed:

When it is not being used.

When the vehicle is being washed in a car wash.

When the vehicle height exceeds the maximum height, for example, in a garage.

Additional information and warnings:

Light page 82

Transporting page 95

Ecological driving page 144

Wheels and tyres page 210

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

The risk of an accident is increased by transporting heavy or bulky loads on the roof, which affects the car's handling by shifting the centre of gravity and increasing susceptibility to cross winds.

Always secure loads correctly with suitable and undamaged attach- ment rope or straps.

Large, heavy, wide and flat loads negatively affect the vehicle aerody- namics, centre of gravity and handling.

Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden braking.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

CAUTION Always remove the roof carrier system from the roof before entering a car wash.

The height of your vehicle is changed by the installation of the roof carri- er and the load secured on it. Compare the vehicle height with the passage height, for example in underground car parks or entering garage doors.

The roof antenna and the range of the rear lid should not be affected by the roof carrier system and the load being transported.

Take extra care not to let the rear lid strike the roof load when opening.

For the sake of the environment The vehicle uses more fuel when the roof carrier system is fitted.

105Transporting

Securing the base supports and roof carrier system

Fig. 72 Attachment points for the basic sup- port and the roof carrier system

The mounts are the basis of a complete roof carrier system. Special fixtures must then be added in order to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. The suitable accessories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Securing the base supports and roof carrier system

The roof carrier system must always be installed exactly according to the in- structions provided.

The front attachment opening can be found in the lower part of the sides of the roof and are fixed with plastic bolts Fig. 72 (left magnified image). The openings can only be seen with the door open. The markings for attach- ment in the lower part are found in the upper part of the rear side windows Fig. 72 (right magnified image).

The base support should only be fitted to the points indicated in the dia- gram.

WARNING

If the base supports and the roof carrier system are incorrectly fitted or used in an unsuitable manner, the entire system could break free causing accident and injury.

Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account.

Only use base supports and roof carrier systems that are not dam- aged and are correctly fitted.

The base support should only be fitted to the points indicated in the diagram Fig. 72.

Secure the base supports and roof carrier system correctly.

Check the screw fittings and attachments before driving and after a short distance. During each long journey, check the attachments during every break.

Always fit the roof carrier system correctly for wheels, skis and surf- boards, etc.

Never change or repair the basic supports or roof carrier system.

Note Read and take into account the instructions included with the roof carrier system fitted and keep them in the vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

Loads can only be correctly secured when the roof carrier system is correctly fitted .

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum authorised roof load is 50 kg. The roof load includes the weight of the base support, the roof carrier system and the load being transported .

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

106 Transporting

Always check the weight of the base support, the roof carrier system and the weight of the load to be transported and, if necessary, weigh them. Nev- er exceed the maximum authorised roof load.

If you are using a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you cannot trans- port the maximum roof load. Do not exceed the maximum weight limit for the roof carrier given in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load

Uniformly distribute loads and secure them correctly .

Check attachments

After fitting the base supports and the roof carrier system, always check the attachments after a short trip or at regular intervals.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load can result in accidents and/or vehicle damage.

Always respect the maximum authorised weight for the roof, the max- imum authorised weight on the axles and the total maximum authorised weight of the vehicle.

Never exceed the capacity of the roof carrier system even if this is less than the maximum authorised roof load.

Secure heavy objects towards the front and distribute the load even- ly.

WARNING

Loose and incorrectly secured loads can fall from the roof carrier system causing accidents and injury.

Always use suitable ropes and straps in good condition.

Always secure loads correctly.

107Transporting

Trailer coupling

Information about trailer coupling

The vehicle is not certified for trailer coupling. The vehicle is not equipped in the manufacture with a towing bracket, nor is it possible to retrofit a tow- ing bracket.

WARNING

Installing a towing bracket on the vehicle may cause accidents and seri- ous injuries while operating the vehicle.

Never install a towing bracket on the vehicle.

The trailer may be released from the vehicle when the vehicle is mov- ing.

CAUTION Any type of towing bracket installed on the vehicle can cause serious and costly damage that are not covered under the SEAT guarantee.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

108 Practical equipment

Practical equipment

Storage compartments

Introduction

Storage compartments must only be used to store light or small objects.

Additional information and warnings:

Care and cleaning of the vehicle interior page 205

Booklet Radio

WARNING

In the event of sudden braking movements or turns, loose objects may be thrown around the vehicle interior. This could cause serious injuries to passengers and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not transport animals or place hard, heavy or sharp objects inside the vehicle in: open storage compartments, dash panel, rear shelf, items of clothing or bags.

While driving, always keep object compartments closed.

WARNING

Objects falling into the driver's footwell could prevent use of the pedals. This could lead the driver to lose control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a serious accident.

Make sure the pedals can be used at all times, with no objects rolling underneath them.

The floor mat should always be secured to the floor.

WARNING (Continued)

Never place other mats or rugs on top of the original mat supplied by the factory.

Make sure that no objects can fall into the driver's footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION Objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating ele- ment in the heated rear window and cause damage.

Do not keep temperature-sensitive objects, food or medicines inside the vehicle. Heat and cold could damage them or render them useless.

Light-transparent objects placed inside the vehicle, such as lenses, magnifying glasses or transparent suction caps on the windows, could con- centrate the sun's rays and cause damage to the vehicle.

Note The ventilating slits between the heated rear window and the rear shelf must not be covered so that used air can escape from the vehicle.

109Practical equipment

Storage compartment on the driver side

Fig. 73 On the driver side: storage compart- ment

There may be a storage compartment on the driver side.

WARNING

In the event of sudden braking movements or turns, loose objects may be thrown around the vehicle interior. This could cause serious injuries to passengers and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not leave animal or objects of a material that is hard, heavy or sharp in the open storage compartment.

Compartment on the centre console

Fig. 74 In the front part of the centre console: storage compartment

The storage compartment Fig. 74 may be used as a drink holder page 113 or as an ashtray* page 115 or to store small objects.

Note A 12 volt electrical socket page 118 can be found in the storage compart- ment.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

110 Practical equipment

Storage compartment with cover on the passenger side*

Fig. 75 Storage compartment with cover on the passenger side

There may be a storage compartment with cover on the passenger side.

Opening and closing the storage compartment cover

Pull the lever to open Fig. 75 1 .

To close, press the cover upwards until it clicks into place.

Sunglasses storage compartment.

Sunglasses can be stored in the passenger side storage compartment.

The sunglasses storage compartment is in the upper area of the storage compartment 2 .

Supports

Next to the sunglasses storage compartment is a notebook holder 3 and in the interior of the storage compartment there is a pen holder 4 , a map storage area and a purse 5 .

WARNING

The risk of serious injuries in the event of an accident during a sudden braking manoeuvre or turn is increased if the storage compartment is left open.

Keep the storage compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION For structural reasons, some model versions will have gaps behind the glove compartment into which small objects may fall. This could lead to strange noises and damage to the vehicle. Therefore, do not store small ob- jects in the storage compartment, apart from those stored in the spaces provided.

Bag holder*

Fig. 76 Storage com- partment on the passen- ger side: foldable hook.

In the storage compartment opening lever on the passenger side there is a foldable hook Fig. 76 used to hang small luggage items, e.g. bags, etc.

111Practical equipment

CAUTION The hook can hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.

When the hook is folded forward it folds up automatically when the stor- age compartment opens.

We recommend that any small luggage items be removed from the hook before opening the storage compartment.

Open storage compartment on the passenger side*

Fig. 77 Open storage compartment on the pas- senger side

There may be an open storage compartment on the passenger side.

Support

In the open storage compartment there is a hook for bags Fig. 77 1 .

WARNING

In the event of sudden braking movements or turns, loose objects may be thrown around the vehicle interior. This could cause serious injuries to passengers and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not leave animal or objects of a material that is hard, heavy or sharp in the open storage compartment.

Storage compartment in the back of the centre console

Fig. 78 In the back part of the centre console: storage compartment

The drink holder in the back part of the centre console page 113 can be used as a storage compartment.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

112 Practical equipment

Other storage compartments

Fig. 79 In front of the rear seats: storage com- partment

Fig. 80 In the centre pil- lars: coat hooks

Coat hooks

In the centre pillars there are coat hooks Fig. 80 (arrow).

Other storage compartments:

In the front door trims page 9.

In front of the rear seats Fig. 79.

Rear shelf for light items of clothing*.

Bag hook in the luggage compartment page 98.

In the upper part of the centre console, in place of the radio Fig. 6 5 .

WARNING

Clothing hung on the coat hooks could restrict the driver's view and lead to serious accidents.

Hang the clothes from the hooks so that driver's view is not restric- ted.

The coat hook is suitable for light items of clothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharp objects in the bags.

113Practical equipment

Drink holders

Introduction

Drink holders

The drink holders are in the open storage compartments in the driver and passenger doors.

Additional information and warnings:

Care and cleaning of the vehicle interior page 205

WARNING

Improper use of the drink holders can cause injury.

Do not place containers with hot drinks in a drink holder. During sud- den braking or driving manoeuvres, the hot drink could be spilled and lead to scalding.

Ensure that bottles and other object is dropped in the driver footwell, as it could get under the pedals and obstruct their working.

Never place heavy containers, food or other heavy objects in the drink holder. In the event of an accident, these heavy objects could be thrown around the vehicle interior and cause serious injuries.

WARNING

Closed bottles inside the vehicle could explode or crack due to the heat or the cold.

Never leave a closed bottle in the vehicle if the inside temperature is too high or too low.

CAUTION Do not leave open drinks containers in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. They could spill during braking, for example, and cause damage to the vehicle and the electrical system.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

114 Practical equipment

Centre console drink holders

Fig. 81 In the front part of the centre console: drink holder

Fig. 82 In the back part of the centre console: drink holder

There are drink holders in the front and rear parts of the centre console.

Securing the drink container in the front drink holder

Fold the drink holder Fig. 81 forward.

Place the drink container in the drink holder so that it surrounds it securely.

115Practical equipment

Ashtray and Lighter

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Power socket page 117

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Undue use of the ashtray and cigarette lighter may cause a fire or burns and other serious injuries.

Never put paper or other flammable objects in the ashtray.

Ashtray*

Fig. 83 In the front part of the centre console: Opening the ashtray

Opening and closing the ashtray

To open, lift the lid of the ashtray in the direction of the arrow Fig. 83.

To close, push the ashtray lid down.

Emptying the ashtray

Remove the ashtray from the storage compartment lifting it up.

After emptying the ashtray, insert it into the drink holder from above.

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 84 In the front part of the centre console: lighter

Push the button on the cigarette lighter inwards with the ignition on Fig. 84.

Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glowing coil .

Replace the cigarette lighter in its insert.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

116 Practical equipment

WARNING

Undue use of the cigarette lighter may cause a fire or burns and other se- rious injuries.

The cigarette lighter must only be used to light cigarettes or similar.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The cigarette lighter can be used when the ignition is switched on.

Note The cigarette lighter can also be used with the 12 Volt socket.

117Practical equipment

Electrical power socket*

Introduction

Electrical equipment can be connected to the socket in the vehicle.

All connected appliances should be in perfect working order without any faults.

Additional information and warnings:

Cigarette lighter page 115

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Improper use of the socket or electrical devices could lead to a fire and cause serious injuries.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The socket and equipment connected to it can be used when the ignition is switched on.

Should a connected electrical device overheat, switch it off and un- plug it immediately.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the vehicle's electrical system, never connect equip- ment that generates electrical current, such as solar panels or battery charg- ers, to the 12 Volt power sockets in order to charge the vehicle's battery.

Only use accessories with approved electromagnetic compatibility ac- cording to current regulations.

To avoid damage due to voltage variations, switch off all appliances con- nected to the 12 V socket before switching the ignition on or off and before starting the engine.

Never connect an appliance to the 12 Volt power socket that consumes more than the power indicated in watts. Exceeding the maximum power ab- sorption could damage the vehicle's electrical system.

For the sake of the environment Do not leave the engine running when the vehicle is at a standstill.

Note Using electrical appliances with the engine stopped and the ignition switch- ed on will drain the battery.

Note Unshielded equipment can cause interference on the radio equipment and the vehicle's electrical system.

Note If electrical equipment is used near an aerial, you may observe interference in the reception of AM stations.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

118 Practical equipment

Vehicle socket

Fig. 85 Front centre con- sole: 12 Volt socket in the storage compartment

Maximum power consumption

Power socket Maximum power consumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

The maximum capacity of the socket must not be exceeded. The power con- sumption is indicated on the rating plate of each appliance.

Where 2 or more appliances are connected at the same time, the total rating of all the connected devices must never exceed 190 Watts .

12 volt power socket

The 12 volt socket is found in the storage compartment in the front part of the centre console Fig. 85 and only functions when the ignition is switch- ed on.

Using electrical appliances with the engine stopped and the ignition switch- ed on will drain the battery. Therefore, electrical consumers connected to the power socket must only be used when the engine is running.

To prevent voltage variations from causing damage, switch off the electrical consumer connected to the 12 Volt power socket before switching the igni- tion on or off and before starting the engine.

CAUTION Always follow the operating instructions for the appliances to be con- nected!

Never exceed the maximum power rating as this could damage the vehi- cle's general electrical system.

12 volt power socket:

Only use accessories with approved electromagnetic compatibility ac- cording to current regulations.

Never power the socket.

119Starting, changing gears, parking

While driving

Starting, changing gears, parking

Stopping and starting the engine

Introduction

Immobiliser display

When an invalid key is used or in the event of a system fault, is dis- played on the instrument panel. The engine cannot be started.

Pushing or towing

For technical reasons, the vehicle must not be push- or tow-started. Jump starting is preferable.

Additional information and warnings:

Vehicle key set page 28

Changing gear page 124

Braking, stopping and parking page 134

Steering page 147

Refuelling page 171

Fuel page 177

Emergency locking and unlocking page 244

Jump starting page 275

Tow starting and towing away page 278

WARNING

Switching off the engine while driving makes stopping the vehicle diffi- cult. As a consequence you may lose control of the vehicle and there is a risk of serious accident.

The assisted braking and steering systems, the airbag system, seat belts and certain safety equipment are only active while the engine is running.

The engine should only be switched off when the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING

While the engine is running or starting it could help reduce the risk of se- rious injury.

Never start or leave the engine running in poorly ventilated or closed spaces. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a toxic, colourless and odourless gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose conscious- ness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. The vehi- cle could move off suddenly or something unexpected could happen re- sulting in damage and serious injury.

Never use start boosters. Cold start sprays could explode or increase the engine speed unexpectedly.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

120 Starting, changing gears, parking

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a fire and considerable damage.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, spilled fuel, dried grass, etc).

Never apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the ex- haust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys- tem.

Ignition lock

Fig. 86 Vehicle key positions

Car keys Fig. 86

No key in the ignition lock: The steering lock may be activated.

0 Ignition switched off. Key can be removed from the vehicle.

1 Ignition is switched on. The steering lock can be unlocked.

2 Switch on the engine. Release the key when the engine has star- ted. When it is released, the key returns to position 1 .

Key not authorised for the vehicle

If a key which is not authorised for this vehicle is inserted in the ignition lock, it can be removed as follows:

Automatic gearbox: the key cannot be removed from the ignition lock. Press and release the selector lever locking button. Key can be removed from the vehicle.

Manual gearbox: Remove the key from the ignition.

121Starting, changing gears, parking

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless use of the vehicle key could result in serious in- jury.

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. The engine could accidentally be started and electrical equipment such as the windows could accidentally be operated resulting in serious injury.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get them- selves to safety. For example, depending on the time of the year, temper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or ex- tremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, partic- ularly for young children.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering may lock and it will not be possible to turn the steering wheel.

Note If the key is left in the ignition lock with the engine off for long periods, the vehicle battery will run flat.

In vehicles with automatic gearbox the ignition key can only be with- drawn with the selector lever in position P. In this case, press and release the selector lever locking button.

Starting the engine

Complete operations only in the sequence given.

1. Press the brake pedal and keep pressed until step 5 has been

completed.

1 a. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: Press the clutch pedal all

the way and keep pressed until the engine starts.

Complete operations only in the sequence given.

2. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector lever in posi-

tion P or N.

3. Turn the key in the ignition lock to position Fig. 86 2 ; do

not press the accelerator.

4. When the engine has started, release the key in the ignition

lock.

5. If the engine does not start, stop the process and try again af-

ter one minute.

6. Release the handbrake when you want to begin driving

page 134.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. The vehicle could move off suddenly, especially if it is in gear, resulting in an acci- dent and serious injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause a sudden increase in the engine speed.

Never use start boosters.

CAUTION An attempt to start the engine while driving or starting the engine imme- diately after turning it off can cause damage to the engine or starter motor.

When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

Do not push or tow start the engine. Unburnt fuel could damage the cat- alytic converter.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

122 Starting, changing gears, parking

For the sake of the environment Do not warm the engine at idle speed; start driving immediately if the visi- bility is OK. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Note Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off tem- porarily when the engine starts.

Note When the engine is started cold, there may be strong vibrations for a few moments for technical reasons. This is quite normal, and no cause for con- cern.

Note Natural gas engines always start up with petrol, as a certain operating tem- perature is required for running with gas. Once the required operating tem- perature is reached, the engine will change to operate with natural gas.

Stopping the engine

Complete operations only in the sequence given.

1. Stopping the vehicle completely .

2. Press the brake pedal and keep pressed until step 4 has been

completed.

3. In automatic gearboxes, put the selector lever in position P

4. Apply the handbrake firmly page 134.

5. Turn the key in the ignition lock to position Fig. 86 0 .

6. With a manual gearbox, put the vehicle in first or reverse gear.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is moving. You may lose control of the vehicle and there is a risk of serious accident.

The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off.

The brake servo does not work with the engine off. To stop, the brake pedal must be pressed with more force.

As the power steering does not work if the engine is not running, you will need more strength to steer than normally.

If the key is removed from the ignition, the steering may lock and it will not be possible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION If the engine has been driven at high speed for a prolonged period of time, it may overheat when turned off. To avoid engine damage, allow the engine to run for approximately 2 minutes in neutral before switching it off.

Note In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P.

After stopping the engine, the engine compartment fan may continue running for a few minutes, even when the ignition has been switched off or the key removed. The radiator fan is automatically switched off.

Electronic immobiliser

The gear lock prevents the engine from being started with an unauthorised key and the vehicle being moved.

The vehicle key has a built-in chip. It automatically deactivates the electron- ic immobiliser when the key is inserted into the ignition lock.

123Starting, changing gears, parking

The electronic immobilizer will be activated again automatically as soon as you remove the key from the ignition lock.

For this reason, the vehicle can only be used with a genuine SEAT key with the correct code. Coded keys can be obtained from SEAT dealerships page 28.

If an unauthorised key is used, the signal appears on the instrument panel display. The vehicle cannot be started in this case

Note The correct operation of the vehicle is only guaranteed when original SEAT keys are used.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

124 Starting, changing gears, parking

Changing gear

Introduction

When reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is switched on the following takes place:

Reverse lights light up.

The rear wiper blade performs one movement when the windscreen wip- er is activated.

If necessary, connect the parking distance warning system.

Additional information and warnings:

Detail of the centre console page 12

Instruments page 17

Braking, stopping and parking page 134

Parking sensor system page 149

Electronic power control and exhaust gases purification system page 237

Emergency locking and unlocking page 244

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction and skidding, especially on slippery ground. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident and considerable damage.

Use rapid acceleration only when visibility, weather, road conditions and traffic permit.

WARNING

Do not allow the brakes to rub for a prolonged period of time, or brake frequently or for long periods of time. Continuous braking heats up the brakes. This could significantly reduce braking power, increase braking distance or even result in the total failure of the brake system.

CAUTION Never make the brakes slip by pressing the pedal gently, if it is not really necessary to brake. This will increase wear.

Reduce speed or reduce the gear when faced with steep and long slopes. This allows you to use the engine braking effect and to reduce the strain on the brake system. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and fail. Only use the brakes to reduce speed or to stop.

125Starting, changing gears, parking

Warning and control lamps

If lit up Possible cause Solution

(red)

Fault in the automatic gear- box.

Do not drive on! Seek professional advice. Fail- ure to do so could result in considerable damage to the transmission page 132.

(yellow)

In the automatic gearbox the gears can engage incor- rectly.

Switch the ignition on and off. When the control lamp does not light up, find the nearest specialised workshop and have the automatic gearbox checked.

The automatic gearbox overheats temporarily.

Let the transmission cool with the gearbox lever in the posi- tion . When the control lamp does not light up, find the nearest specialised workshop and have the automatic gear- box checked.

If lit up Possible cause Solution

Place the automatic gear- box lever in the position and do not press the brake pedal.

Press the brake pedal to select a gear range.

Together with the yellow control lamp for the temper- ature of the transmission : the automatic gearbox overheats.

Press brake pedal and let the transmission cool. Avoid pressing the accelerator. When the control lamp does not light up, find the nearest specialised workshop and have the automatic gearbox checked.

Together with the turn sig- nal display in the instru- ment panel display: the au- tomatic gearbox lever is not in the position , indication to start the engine.

Move the gearbox lever to the position and start the en- gine.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

126 Starting, changing gears, parking

If flash-

ing Possible cause Solution

An automatic gearbox in the vehicle does not guarantee that the vehicle will not roll away.

Apply the handbrake.

In the instrument panel dis- play, in addition to the control lamp requesting the brake pedal to be pressed : Indica- tion to start the engine.

Move the gearbox lever to the po- sition and start the engine.

On the instrument panel dis- play: Whilst driving in a for- ward direction, try to move the automatic gearbox lever to the position .

Stop the vehicle and move the gearbox lever to the position in order to subsequently change to the position .

On the instrument panel dis- play: The automatic gearbox lever was placed in the posi- tion or , but the brake pedal was not pressed.

Press the brake pedal, move the gearbox lever to the position , and subsequently to the required position or .

When switching on the ignition some warning and control lamps light up for a short time to check the operations. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

127Starting, changing gears, parking

Pedals

Fig. 87 Pedals in vehi- cles with a manual gear- box: 1 accelerator; 2

brake; 3 clutch

Fig. 88 Pedals in vehi- cles with an automatic gearbox: 1 accelerator;

2 brake

Do not allow floor mats or other objects to obstruct the free passage of the pedals.

Floor mats should leave the pedal area free and unobstructed and be cor- rectly secured in the footwell zone.

In the event of failure of a brake circuit, the brake pedal must be pressed harder than normal to brake the vehicle.

WARNING

Objects falling into the driver's footwell could prevent use of the pedals. This could lead the driver to lose control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a serious accident.

Make sure the pedals can be used at all times, with no objects rolling underneath them.

Always secure the mat in the footwell.

Never place other mats or rugs on top of the original mat supplied by the factory.

Ensure that no objects can fall into the driver's footwell while the ve- hicle is in motion.

CAUTION The pedals must always have free and unobstructed passage to the floor. For example, in case of a fault in the brake circuit, the brake pedal will need to be pressed further to stop the vehicle. To press the brake pedal down fur- ther will require more force than usual.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

128 Starting, changing gears, parking

Manual gearbox: Engaging gears

Fig. 89 Gear shift pat- tern of a 5-speed manual gearbox

The position of each of the gears is shown on the gear stick Fig. 89.

Keep the clutch pedal pushed all the way down.

Move the gearbox lever to the required position .

Release the clutch pedal to engage clutch.

In some countries, it is necessary to press the clutch pedal to the floor to start the engine.

Selecting reverse gear

Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is stopped.

Keep the clutch pedal pushed all the way down .

Move the gear lever into the neutral position.

Move the gear stick to the right and then backwards to reverse gear R .

Release the clutch pedal to engage clutch.

Shifting down a gear

Shifting down a gear while driving must be carried out gear by gear, i.e. to the gear immediately preceding the current gear and at an engine speed that is not excessive . At high speeds, or high engine speeds, skipping one or various gears when shifting down a gear can cause damage to the clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch is not engaged during the process .

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released.

Never engage the reverse gear when a vehicle is moving forward.

WARNING

As a consequence of shifting down a gear incorrectly, you may lose con- trol of the vehicle and cause an accident with serious consequences.

CAUTION If, at high speeds or high engine speeds the gear lever is shifted down to a gear that is too low, serious damage can be caused to the clutch and gear- box. This also applies if you press the clutch pedal and it does not engage.

CAUTION To prevent damage and avoid premature wear, please observe the follow- ing:

While driving, do not leave your hand resting on the gear stick. The pres- sure applied by your hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector forks.

Always ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped before engaging the reverse gear.

129Starting, changing gears, parking

When changing gear, always make sure the clutch pedal is pushed right to the floor.

Never hold the vehicle on the clutch on hills.

Automatic gearbox: engaging a gear

Fig. 90 Automatic gear- box selector lever

Fig. 91 Automatic gear- box diagram of gears

To move the gear selector lever from the position N to D or to R, first press and hold the brake pedal.

In the instrument panel display, with the ignition switched on, the selected gear range or the gear engaged in the gearbox is shown.

Selector lever positions

Denomination Meaning

Reverse gear Reverse gear is selected. Engage only when the vehicle is stopped.

Neutral The gear box is in neutral. No movement is transmitted to the wheels and the en- gine does not act as a brake.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

130 Starting, changing gears, parking

Selector lever positions

Denomination Meaning

Standard driving

position

The gears are changed (up and down) automatically. The gear shifts are deter- mined by the engine load, your individ- ual driving style and the speed of the vehicle.

Tiptronic driving position (manual shift programme)

All gears can be changed (up and down) manually page 130. This is possible as long as the system is not changing gear automatically due to a traffic situa- tion.

WARNING

Placing the selector lever in an incorrect position may cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle and a serious accident.

Do not press the accelerator when engaging a range of gears.

With the engine running and a gear range selected, the vehicle will move off when the brake pedal is released.

Never engage reverse gear while driving.

Unintentional movements of the vehicle could cause serious injury.

As a driver, you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is run- ning and a gear range is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is running, you must always apply the handbrake and put the selector lever in position N.

Never engage the R gear range when the vehicle is moving.

Never leave the vehicle without applying the handbrake. With the en- gine running the vehicle moves downhill regardless of the gear range se- lected.

Note If, while driving, the selector lever is accidentally placed in position N, lift your foot off the accelerator. Wait until the engine is running at idle speed before selecting a new gear range.

Engaging gear with Tiptronic

Fig. 92 Lever in the Tip- tronic position

With Tiptronic, the gears can be changed up or down manually with the au- tomatic gearbox. When you change to the Tiptronic programme, the vehicle remains in the currently selected gear. This is possible as long as the sys- tem is not changing gear automatically due to a traffic situation.

131Starting, changing gears, parking

Using Tiptronic

Place the lever in the position D to the left on the Tiptronic shift gate M in Automatic gearbox: engaging a gear on page 130.

Press the lever forwards + or backwards to move up or down a gear Fig. 92.

Place the lever back to the position M to the left on the Tiptronic shift gate, to leave Tiptronic mode in Automatic gearbox: engaging a gear on page 130.

With the lever in the position D, and pressing forwards + or backwards

the Tiptronic programme can be selected M.

CAUTION When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the next gear shortly before the maximum engine speed is reached.

When reducing speed manually, the gear box only shifts gear when the engine can no longer exceed the maximum engine speed.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automatically as the vehicle moves.

Driving down hills

The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you will need to select. The low- est gears increase the engine braking work. Never go down hills with the se- lector lever in neutral N.

You should reduce speed accordingly.

Place the lever in the position D to the left on the Tiptronic shift gate M page 130.

Gently pull the selector lever back to change down a gear.

Starting when going up a slope

The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you will need.

When stopping on a slope with a gear range engaged, the vehicle must be prevented from rolling backwards by always pressing the brake pedal or pulling the handbrake lever up. When starting, release the brake pedal or the handbrake .

Kick-down

The kickdown system provides maximum acceleration when the gear selec- tor lever is in the position D, or in the Tiptronic position M.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down, the automatic gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. This takes advantage of the maximum acceleration of the vehicle .

When the accelerator is pressed to the floor, the automatic gearbox shifts to the next gear only after the engine reaches the specified maximum engine speed.

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction and skidding, especially on slippery ground. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident and serious injury.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the flow of traffic.

Only use the kick-down function or rapid acceleration if visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions so permit.

Never put other road users in danger by accelerating or with your driving style.

CAUTION If you stop on a hill with a gear range engaged, do not try to prevent the vehicle from rolling back by pressing on the accelerator. Otherwise, the au- tomatic gearbox may overheat causing damage.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

132 Starting, changing gears, parking

Automatic gearbox malfunction

Back-up programme

When automatic gearbox warning and control lamps light up on the instru- ment panel, there may be a system malfunction page 124. In the event of some faults the automatic gearbox functions using a backup programme. When the backup programme is activated, it is possible to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and within a selected range of gears.

With the manual gearbox, in some cases it is not possible to drive with all the gears.

In all cases the automatic gearbox must be checked at a specialised work- shop.

Automatic gearbox overheating

The automatic gearbox can overheat with a prolonged start up, or when stopping and starting continuously. This overheating is displayed with a warning lamp in the instrument panel. Additionally, an audible warning can be heard. Stop and let the gearbox cool .

The vehicle moves forward or back despite having selected a gear range

When the vehicle does not move in the required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engaged. Press the brake pedal and en- gage the gear range again. If the vehicle still does not move in the required direction, there is a system malfunction. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked.

CAUTION When the gearbox is displayed as overheating for the first time, the vehi- cle must be parked safely or must be driven at a speed of more than 20 km/ h (12 mph).

When the warning lamp lights up and the audible warning is sounded, the vehicle must be parked safely and the engine switched off. Let the gear- box cool down.

To prevent damage to the gearbox, driving must only be continued when the warning lamps are no longer lit up. While the gearbox is overheated, starting up and driving at walking speed should be avoided.

Recommended gear display

In some vehicles, the recommended gear for reducing fuel consumption is displayed on the instrument panel:

display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Recommendation to change up a gear.

Recommendation to change down a gear.

WARNING

The recommended gear display is intended as a guideline only; it should never replace the driver's attention to driving carefully.

Responsibility for selecting the correct gear for each situation contin- ues to lie with the driver, for example when overtaking or climbing a hill.

133Starting, changing gears, parking

For the sake of the environment Selecting the most appropriate gear for the situation will help you to save fuel.

Note The recommended gear display is switched off when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Note On the display of the Portable Navigation System (supplied by SEAT) page 222 the recommended gear can also be seen.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

134 Starting, changing gears, parking

Braking, stopping and parking

Introduction

The assisted braking systems are the electronic distribution of the brake force (EBV), the anti-lock brake system (ABS), the brake assist system (BAS), the electronic differential lock (EDL), the traction control (TC), the traction control system (ASR) and the electronic stability control (ESC*).

Additional information and warnings:

Wheels and tyres page 210

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Driving with worn brake pads or a faulty brake system may lead to seri- ous accident.

If you believe the brake pads to be worn or the brake system to be faulty, immediately refer to a specialised workshop to check the brake pads and replace the worn brake pads.

WARNING

Careless parking can cause serious injury.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering lock may engage and locked the steering wheel making the vehi- cle impossible to control.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, spilled fuel, dried grass, etc).

WARNING (Continued)

Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when you park.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. They could release the electronic parking brake, activate the selector lever or gear stick and start the vehicle moving. This could result in a serious ac- cident.

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. The engine could accidentally be started and electrical equipment such as the windows could accidentally be operated resulting in serious injury.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get them- selves to safety. For example, depending on the time of the year, temper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or ex- tremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, partic- ularly for young children.

CAUTION Special care should be taken when parking in areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Objects protruding from the ground may damage the bumper or other parts of the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid damage, stop be- fore the wheels touched the barrier or kerb.

Special attention is required when driving through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or other objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers, mudguards and running gear, and the engine and exhaust system could be damaged as you drive over these objects.

135Starting, changing gears, parking

Warning and control lamps

lights up

Possible cause Solution

Handbrake applied. page 136.

Fault in the brake system Do not drive on! Seek professional advice page 138.

Brake fluid level inadequate. Do not drive on! Check brake fluid level page 142.

Together with the ABS control lamp : ABS and EBV do not function.

Do not drive on! Seek professional advice page 138.

ESC* disconnected by system. Switching the ignition on and off If necessary, drive for a short dis- tance.

Fault in ESC*. Contact a specialised workshop.

Together with the ABS control lamp : Fault in ABS.

Contact a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be braked with- out ABS.

The battery has been recon- nected.

page 193.

Traction Control faulty or switched off by the system.

Contact a specialised workshop.

Together with the ESC* control lamp : Fault in ABS.

Contact a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be braked with- out ABS.

Together with the warning lamp : ABS and EBV do not function.

Do not drive on! Seek professional advice page 138.

flash- es

Possible cause Solution

ESC* or ASR regulating. Take your foot off the accelerator. Adjust your driving style to the road conditions.

Traction Control regulator oper- ating.

Take your foot off the accelerator. Adjust your driving style to the road conditions.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

WARNING

Driving with brakes in bad condition could result in a serious accident.

If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low or there is a fault in the brake system. Obtain professional assistance immediately page 141, Brake fluid.

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the regulation function of the ABS could be malfunctioning. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. If the rear wheels lock this could result in loss of vehicle control! If possible, reduce

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

136 Starting, changing gears, parking

WARNING (Continued)

your speed and drive carefully to a specialised workshop close by to check the brake system. During the following journey, avoid sudden brak- ing and manoeuvres.

If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it lights while driv- ing, the ABS is malfunctioning. The vehicle can only be stopped using normal braking without ABS. The protection provided by the ABS is not available. Visit a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Handbrake

Fig. 93 Between the front seats: Handbrake

Using the handbrake

Pull firmly in an upwards direction on the handbrake lever while press- ing the button.

The handbrake is applied when the control lamp lights up on the in- strument panel page 135 when the ignition is switched on.

Releasing the handbrake

Pull gently in an upwards direction on the handbrake lever and press the lock button Fig. 93 (arrow).

Move the handbrake lever downwards keeping the lock button pressed.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the handbrake may result in a serious accident.

Never use the handbrake to brake the vehicle except in an emergency. The braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only ap- plied to the rear wheels. Always use the foot brake.

Never drive with the handbrake gently applied. This can overheat the brake, affecting the brakes system. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads.

Never accelerate from the engine compartment with the engine run- ning and a gear engaged. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied.

Note If the vehicle moves at a speed superior to 6 km/h (4 mph) with the hand- brake applied, an audible warning is sounded.

Parking

When parking your vehicle, all legal requirements should be observed.

137Starting, changing gears, parking

To park the vehicle

Complete operations only in the sequence given.

Park the vehicle on a suitable surface .

Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Apply the handbrake firmly page 136.

For an automatic gearbox, move the selector lever to position P.

Switch off the engine and release the brake pedal.

Remove the key from the ignition.

If necessary, turn the steering wheel slightly to lock the steering.

With a manual gearbox, engage the 1st gear on flat ground and slopes, or even the reverse gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.

Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle, especially children.

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with you.

Lock the vehicle.

Additional information for steep slopes and hills

Before switching off the engine, rotate the steering wheel so that if the vehi- cle should move then it will be held by the kerb.

On slopes, turn the front wheels so that they are against the edge of the kerb.

Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of the road.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a fire and considerable damage.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, spilled fuel, dried grass, etc).

CAUTION Special care should be taken when parking in areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Objects protruding from the ground may damage the bumper or other parts of the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid damage, stop be- fore the wheels touched the barrier or kerb.

Special attention is required when driving through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or other objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers, mudguards and running gear, and the engine and exhaust system could be damaged as you drive over these objects.

Information about the brakes

For the first 200 to 300 km (120 to 190 mph), the new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum braking capacity, and need to be run in first . The slightly reduced braking effect can be compensated for by in- creasing pressure on the brake pedal. While running in, the full braking dis- tance or emergency braking distance is larger then when the brake pads have been run in. While running in, avoid full power braking or situations requiring braking performance. For example, in heavy traffic.

The rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the condi- tions in which the vehicle is used and the way the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is used frequently in city traffic or for short trips or driven sport style, visit a specialised workshop regularly, more frequently than advised in the Maintenance Programme, to have the bake pads checked.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the effect of the brakes is less- ened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter). At higher speed, dry the brakes as quickly as possible by braking gently several times. Only do this without endangering vehicles behind you or any other road users .

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

138 Starting, changing gears, parking

A layer of salt on the discs and brake pads will reduce the effectiveness of the brakes and increase braking distance. If you drive for a prolonged peri- od on salted roads without braking then brake carefully several times to eliminate the layer of salt on the brakes .

If the vehicle remains parked for considerable lengths of time, is used little, or if the brakes are not used, there may be corrosion on the brake discs and a build up of dirt on the brake pads. If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the discs, SEAT recommends cleaning the pads and discs by braking firmly a few times at a moderately high speed. Only do this without endangering vehicles behind you or any other road users .

Faults in the brake system

During braking, if you notice that the vehicle does not react as usual (that the braking distance has increased suddenly) it may be possible that there is a fault in the braking system. This is indicated by the warning lamp . Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop immediately and have the fault repaired. Drive at a moderate speed and be prepared to use more pressure on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stopping distances.

Brake servo

The brake servo only operates when the engine is running and the pressure applied by the driver on the brake pedal increases.

If the brake servo does not operate or the vehicle must be towed, then the brake pedal will have to be pressed with more force given that the braking distance will be increased when the brake servo does not operate .

WARNING

New brake pads do not brake to full efficiency.

For the first 320 km (200 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum braking capacity, and need to be run in first. For this, to compensate for reduced braking efficiency the brake pedal will have to be pressed with more force.

WARNING (Continued)

To avoid losing control of the vehicle and causing serious accidents, always take great care when driving with new brake pads.

When running in new brake pads, always respect the safety distances between you and other vehicles and do not cause situations requiring ex- treme braking performance.

WARNING

When brakes overheat, braking is less efficient and braking distances in- crease.

When driving on slopes, brakes can be overloaded and overheat quickly.

Reduce speed or reduce the gear when faced with steep and long slopes. This allows you to use the engine braking effect and to reduce the strain on the brake system.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat.

WARNING

Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take time to brake and this increases braking distances.

Test the brakes carefully.

Dry the brakes, free them of ice and salt by braking gently several times, when visibility, weather, and road and traffic conditions permit.

139Starting, changing gears, parking

WARNING

Driving without the brake servo may significantly increase the braking distance and result in a severe accident.

Never allow the vehicle to move forwards when the engine is switched off.

If the brake servo does not operate or the vehicle must be towed, then the brake pedal will have to be pressed with more force given that the braking distance will be increased when the brake servo does not op- erate.

CAUTION Never make the brakes slip by pressing the pedal gently, if it is not really necessary to brake. Continuously pressing on the brake pedal will heat the brakes. This could significantly reduce braking power, increase braking dis- tance or even result in the total failure of the brake system.

Reduce speed or reduce the gear when faced with steep and long slopes. This allows you to use the engine braking effect and to reduce the strain on the brake system. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and fail. Only use the brakes to reduce speed or to stop.

Note Make use, when having the front brake pads checked, and have the rear pads checked also. The thickness of the brake pads should be checked vis- ually and regularly, by looking through the openings in the wheel rims or from underneath the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wheels to check them thoroughly. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Brake assist systems

The assisted braking systems ESC*, ABS, EBV, BAS, ASR, TC and EDL only operate when the ignition is switched on. They contribute significantly to in- creasing active safety.

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP)*

ESC* reduces the risk of skidding and increases the vehicle stability by braking individual wheels under specific driving conditions. ESC* detects critical handling situations, such as understeer, oversteer and wheelspin on the driven wheels. The system stabilises the vehicle by braking individual wheels or by reducing the engine torque.

The ESC* has limits. It is important to realise that the ESC* is also subject to the laws of physics. ESC* will not be able to deal with all situations with which drivers may be faced. For example, if the road surface changes sud- denly then ESC* will not be useful in all cases. If the vehicle suddenly enters a section covered by water, mud or snow then ESC* will not provide assis- tance in the same way as on dry ground. If the vehicle loses its grip on the ground and moves on a film of water (aquaplaning), the ESC* will not be able to assist the driver to control the vehicle due to the loss of adherence with the road surface preventing braking and steering. If the vehicle is driv- en through series of bends at high speed, the ESC* will not always be as effective: the vehicle reaction to aggressive driving is not the same as at re- duced speeds.

Adjust your speed and driving style to suit visibility, and weather, road and traffic conditions. ESC* cannot push the limits of the laws of physics; im- prove the transmission available or maintain the vehicle on the road if a lack of driver attention creates an inevitable situation. Otherwise, ESC* as- sists in maintaining vehicle control in extreme situations and uses the movements of the steering made by the driver to maintain the vehicle mov- ing in the desired direction. If the vehicle is driven at such a speed that it will leave the road before ESC* can intervene then the system cannot pro- vide assistance.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

140 Starting, changing gears, parking

The ABS, BAS, ASR and EDL systems are incorporated into the ESC*. The ESC* is always on1).

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS can prevent the wheels from locking during braking until just before the vehicle stops thus helping the driver to steer the vehicle and maintain control. This means that, even during full braking, the risk of skidding is re- duced:

Press and hold the brake pedal fully. Do not remove your foot from the brake pedal or reduce braking force!

Do not pump the brake pedal, or reduce braking force!

Maintain vehicle direction when braking fully.

When the brake pedal is released or when the brake force is reduced, ABS is turned off.

ABS control can be observed by vibration of the brake pedal and noise. You should never expect the ABS to reduce the braking distance under any cir- cumstances. Braking distances will increase when driving on gravel, recent snow or on icy and slippery ground.

Brake assist system (BAS)

The brake assist system may reduce the required braking distance. The brake assist system boosts the braking force if you press the brake pedal quickly in an emergency. As a result, the braking pressure increases rapidly, the braking force is multiplied and the braking distance is reduced. This en- ables the ABS to be activated more quickly and effectively.

!Do not lift your foot off the brake pedal! When the brake pedal is released or when the brake force is reduced, braking assist automatically turns off the brake servo.

Traction control system (ASR) or Traction Control (TC)

In the event of wheelspin, the traction control system ASR or TC reduces the engine torque to match the amount of grip available. The ASR or TC makes some situations easier, for example, when starting, accelerating or going uphill, even in unfavourable road conditions.

Electronic differential lock system (EDL)

EDL is available when driving in straight lines under normal conditions. When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel and directs the power to the other driven wheel. To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automatically if subjected to ex- cessive loads. The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

WARNING

Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet ground can result in loss of ve- hicle control and serious injury to the driver and passengers.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. Even though the braking assist systems, ABS, BAS, EDL, ASR, TC and ESC*, provide more security, do not take unnecessary risks while driving.

Brake assist systems can not overcome the laws of physics. Even with ESC* and other systems, slippery and wet roads will always be danger- ous.

Driving to quickly on wet ground can result in the wheels losing con- tact with the ground in an effect known as aquaplaning. Without adher- ence, it is impossible to brake, steer or control the vehicle.

Brake assist systems cannot avoid accidents if, for example, the driv- er does not respect safety distances or drives to quickly in difficult condi- tions.

1) According to version

141Starting, changing gears, parking

WARNING (Continued)

Even though brake assist systems are extremely effective and help control the vehicle in difficult situations, remember that the vehicle sta- bility depends on tyre grip.

When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. The wheels can still slip even with brake assist systems resulting in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

The effectiveness of the ESC* can be considerably reduced if other com- ponents and systems affecting driving dynamics are not maintained or are not functioning correctly. This includes, among others, brakes, tyres and other systems already mentioned.

Remember that changing and fitting other components to the vehicle can affect operation of the ABS, BAS, ASR TC, EDL and ESC*.

Changes to the vehicle suspension or using unapproved wheel/tyre combinations can affect operation of the ABS, BAS, ASR, TC, EDL and ESC* and their effectiveness.

Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC* depends on the use of suitable tyres page 210.

Note To ensure that the ESC*, ASR and TC work properly, all four wheels must be fitted with identical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

Note If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, the ESC*, ASR, TC and EDL will al- so be affected.

Note Noises may be heard while any of the above systems are operating.

Brake fluid

Fig. 94 In the engine compartment: brake fluid reservoir, lid

In the course of time, the brake fluid absorbs water from the ambient air. If there is too much water contained in the brake fluid, the brake system could be damaged. In addition, the boiling point of the brake fluid is significantly lowered. When the brake fluid contains too much water and the brakes are subject to considerable forces, bubbles of water vapour can form in the sys- tem. These bubbles of water vapour can significantly reduce braking power, notably increasing braking distance, and could even result in the total fail- ure of the brake system. Ensuring that the brake system is always function- ing correctly is essential for your own safety and the safety of other road users .

Brake fluid specifications

SEAT have developed a special brake fluid optimised for the brake systems of their vehicles. To ensure the optimum working of the brake system, SEAT

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

142 Starting, changing gears, parking

recommends the use of brake fluid in accordance with the VW 501 14 standard. If this brake fluid is not available or another brake fluid is used for different reasons, use a brake fluid that complies with the United States standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or the German standard DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 .

Brake fluids conforming to the standard VW 501 14, fulfil the American re- quirements of the FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard and the German DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard. However, fluids that comply with the Amer- ican FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or the German DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard do not necessarily comply with the VW 501 14 standard. Always check the information on the brake fluid container and ensure that you are using suitable brake fluid.

A suitable brake fluid can be obtained from SEAT dealerships.

Brake fluid level

The level of the brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks, or above the MIN mark .

It is not always possible to check the level of the brake fluid, as in some models the engine components make it difficult to see the brake fluid reser- voir. If you cannot read the exact brake fluid level, consult a specialist.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used due to wear of the brake pads and the automatic readjustment of the brake.

Changing the brake fluid

The brake fluid should be changed in accordance with the instructions giv- en in the Maintenance Programme. Have the brake fluid changed by a spe- cialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service. This means that only brake fluid complying with the required specifications will be used.

WARNING

If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old brake fluid is used, the brake system may fail or braking power will be reduced.

Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly!

The brake fluid should be changed regularly in accordance with the instructions given in the Maintenance Programme.

When the brake fluid is used and brakes are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake system. These bub- bles of water vapour can significantly reduce braking power, notably in- creasing braking distance, and could even result in the total failure of the brake system.

Always ensure that you use suitable brake fluid. Only used brake fluid that conforms to the VW 501 14 standard, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or even the DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard. Other types of brake fluid could affect brake operation and reduce braking power. Do not use a brake fluid if the container does not specify compliance with the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards.

The replacement brake fluid must be new.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous.

To reduce the risk of poisoning, do not keep brake fluid in drinks bot- tles/containers or similar. Other people could drink from these recipients even if the contents are clearly marked.

Always keep brake fluid in the original container; keep it correctly sealed and out of reach of children.

CAUTION Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork immediately.

143Starting, changing gears, parking

For the sake of the environment Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

144 Starting, changing gears, parking

Ecological driving

Introduction

Fuel consumption, environmental impact and engine, brake and tyre wear depend largely on 3 factors:

Personal driving style.

Conditions of use (weather, road surface).

Technical requirements.

Savings of up to 25% in fuel consumption are possible with an appropriate driving style and the adoption of certain simple tips.

WARNING

Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traf- fic situation.

Economic driving style

Changing gear early

General instructions: The highest gear is always the most economical gear. As a guideline, for the majority of vehicles: At a speed of 30 km/h (19 mph), drive in third gear, at 40 km/h (25 mph) in fourth gear and at 50 km/h (30 mph) in fifth gear.

In addition, skipping gears when shifting up helps to save fuel, weather and traffic conditions permitting.

Do not wait until the last moment before changing gear. Only use first gear when you move off and change to second gear quickly. Avoid the kick-down function in vehicles with automatic gearbox.

Vehicles with a gear display help to achieve an economical driving style as the display indicates the best moment to change gear.

Let the vehicle roll

If you take your foot off the accelerator, the fuel supply is stopped and con- sumption is reduced.

Allow the vehicle to roll without accelerating, for example when approach- ing a red traffic light. However, if the vehicle is rolling too slowly or the dis- tance is too long, the clutch pedal should be pressed to declutch. The en- gine will then operate at idle speed.

If the vehicle is going to be at a standstill for a period of time, switch off the engine; for example, while waiting at a level crossing.

Think ahead and flow with the traffic

Frequent acceleration and braking considerably increase fuel consumption. If you think ahead as you drive and keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front, it is possible to slow down by simply lifting your foot off the accelera- tor. This eliminates the need for constant braking and acceleration.

Calm and steady driving

Constancy is more important than speed: The more you drive at a constant speed, the lower the fuel consumption.

When driving on the motorway, it is more efficient to drive at a constant and more moderate speed than to be continuously accelerating and braking. As a general rule, you will reach your destination just as quickly when you drive at a constant speed.

The cruise control function helps you to achieve a constant style of driving.

145Starting, changing gears, parking

Moderate use of additional electrical appliances

It is important to travel in comfort, but convenience systems should be used in an ecological manner.

Some equipment, when connected, increase fuel consumption considera- bly, for example:

Air conditioning cooling system: If the air conditioning system is re- quired to cool to significantly lower temperatures than the true outside tem- perature, it will require a large quantity of energy from the engine. There- fore, we recommend that the selected temperature for the vehicle is not too different to the outside temperature. It is a good idea to open all the win- dows of the car before starting your journey, and to drive a short distance with all the windows open to allow the vehicle to cool down slightly. Only then should you close all the windows and switch on the air conditioning. Keep windows closed when travelling at high speeds. Driving with the win- dows open increases fuel consumption.

Switch off the seat heating when the seats have warmed up.

Switch off the heated rear window when it is not moist or covered in ice.

Other factors which increase fuel consumption (examples):

Fault in engine management.

Driving on hills.

Saving fuel while driving

Fig. 95 Fuel consump- tion in litres per 100 km at 2 different outside temperatures

By adopting an economical driving style and anticipating the traffic situa- tion ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. By anticipating the traffic situa- tion ahead, you will brake and therefore accelerate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll slowly to a stop, for instance when you can see that the next traffic lights are red.

Avoid short journeys

Fuel consumption is much higher when the engine is cold, immediately af- ter it has been started. It takes a few kilometres of driving for the engine to warm up and to normalise consumption.

The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their proper working tem- perature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions. The ambient temperature has a decisive influence.

Fig. 95 shows the difference in consumption for the same journey at +20 C (+68 F) and at -10 C (+14 F).

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

146 Starting, changing gears, parking

Unnecessary short journeys should be avoided. Try to combine trips.

The vehicle uses more fuel in winter than in summer, even when other con- ditions are the same.

Warming the engine is not only forbidden in some countries, but in prac- tice it is technically superfluous as it is a waste of fuel.

Adjusting type pressures.

Having the correct pressure in your tyres helps to reduce rolling resistance and, as a result reduces fuel consumption. Increasing the tyre pressure slightly (+ 0.2 bar / + 3 psi / + 200 kPa) can help to save fuel.

When you buy new tyres, make sure they are optimised for minimum rolling resistance.

Use low friction engine oil

The use of low viscosity totally synthetic oils, known as low friction engine oil, help to reduce fuel consumption. Low friction engine oils reduce the re- sistance caused by friction in the engine, they flow around the engine more quickly and efficiently, particularly in cold starts. The effect is particularly noticeable in vehicles frequently used for short journeys.

Always check the engine oil level and observe service intervals (engine oil change intervals).

When purchasing engine oil, always observe legal requirements and ensure that the oil is approved by SEAT.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

The lighter the vehicle, the more economical and ecological the driving style. For example, an additional weight of 100 kg will increase fuel con- sumption up to 0.3 l/100 km.

Remove any unnecessary objects or loads from the vehicle.

Remove optional equipment and unnecessary accessories

The more aerodynamic the vehicle, the lower the fuel consumption. Option- al equipment and accessories (such as roof racks or bike carriers) reduce the aerodynamic benefits of the vehicle.

Therefore, we recommend you remove all optional and unnecessary equip- ment and racks, especially if you intend to drive at high speeds.

147Starting, changing gears, parking

Steering

Introduction

The power steering* is not hydraulic but electromechanical. The advantage of this steering system is that it disposes of hydraulic tubes, hydraulic oil, the pump, filter and other components. The electromechanical system saves fuel. While a hydraulic system requires oil pressure to be maintained, electromechanical steering only requires energy when the steering wheel is turned.

With the power steering system, the assisted steering function automatical- ly adjusts according to the vehicle speed, the steering torque and the wheel turning angle. The power steering only works when the engine is running.

Additional information and warnings:

Start and stop the engine page 119

Vehicle battery page 193

Tow starting and towing away page 278

WARNING

If the power steering is not working then the steering wheel is much more difficult to turn and the vehicle more difficult to control.

The power steering only works when the engine is running.

Never allow the vehicle to move when the engine is switched off.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering may lock and it will not be possible to turn the steering wheel.

Control and warning lamps

lights up Possible cause Solution

(red)

Power steering faulty. The steering system should be checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

(yellow)

Power steering operation reduced.

The steering system should be checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible. If, after restarting the engine and driving for a short dis- tance, the yellow warning lamp no longer comes on, it will not be necessary to take the vehicle to a specialised workshop.

flashes Possible cause Solution

(red)

Fault in the steering column electronic lock.

Do not drive on! Seek professional advice.

(yellow)

Steering column deviation. Gently turn the steering wheel to and fro.

Steering wheel not un- locked or locked.

Remove the key from the igni- tion and then switch the igni- tion back on. If necessary, check the messages displayed on the instrument panel dis- play. Do not drive on, if the steering column remains locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek specialist assistance.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

148 Starting, changing gears, parking

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Information on the steering

To prevent theft, we recommend you lock the steering before leaving the ve- hicle.

Mechanical steering lock

Lock the steering column by removing the key from the ignition when the vehicle is stopped.

Please engage steering lock Unlocking the steering

Parking the vehicle page 134. Insert the key in the ignition lock.

Remove the key from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to release the steering lock.

Turn the steering wheel slightly until you hear the steering lock.

Hold the steering wheel in this posi- tion and switch on the ignition.

Electromechanical power steering

With the power steering system, the assisted steering function automatical- ly adjusts according to the vehicle speed, the steering torque and the wheel turning angle. The power steering only works when the engine is running.

You should remember that you will need considerably more power than nor- mal to steer the vehicle if the power steering is not working correctly or not at all.

149Driver assistance systems

Driver assistance systems

Parking sensor system*

Introduction

The parking sensor system assists the driver when parking. If the rear of the vehicle is approaching an obstacle, an intermittent audible warning is emit- ted. The shorter the distance, the shorter the intervals between tones. If the vehicle is too close to the obstacle, the audible warning becomes constant.

If you continue to approach an obstacle when the sound is continuous, this means the system can no longer measure the distance.

Sensors situated on the rear bumper transmit and receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasound signal (transmission, reflection from the obstacles and re- ception), this system continuously calculates the distance between the bumper and the obstacle.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

The parking distance warning system cannot replace the driver's assess- ment of the situation.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered.

Always observe the area around the vehicle, as the sensors do not al- ways detect small children, animals or objects.

WARNING (Continued)

The surface of certain objects and some clothing do not reflect the ul- trasound signals from the parking distance system. The system cannot detect or incorrectly detects these objects and people wearing these types of clothes.

External sound sources can affect the parking distance aid signals. In this case, under certain circumstances, people and objects will not be de- tected.

CAUTION The sensors may not always be able to detect objects such as trailer draw bars, thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open luggage compartments, etc. This could result in damage to your car.

Although the parking sensor system detects and warns of the presence of an obstacle, the obstacle could disappear from the angle of measure- ment of the sensors if it is too high or low and the system would no longer indicate it. Therefore, it will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring the warnings of the parking sensor system could cause considerable damage to the vehicle.

The bumper sensors may become damaged or misaligned, for example, when parking.

To ensure that the system works properly, the bumper sensors must be kept clean, free of ice and snow and uncovered.

When cleaning the sensors with high-pressure or steam cleaning equip- ment, spray the sensors briefly at a distance of no less than 10 cm.

Different sources of noise can produce errors in the parking distance warning system, e.g. parking distance warning systems from other vehicles, inductive loops or construction works machines.

Retrofitting of components to the vehicle, such as a bicycle carrier, may interfere with the function of the parking distance warning system.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

150 Driver assistance systems

Parking distance warning system

Fig. 96 Parking distance warning system sensors on the rear bumper

The 3 sensors of the parking distance warning system are situated on the rear bumper Fig. 96.

Switching the parking sensor system on and off

Switching on: With the ignition switched on, select reverse gear. A short audible warning confirms that the parking distance warning system is switched on and functioning.

Switching off: release reverse gear.

Things to note on the parking distance warning system

The parking sensor system sometimes registers water on the sensors as an obstacle.

If the distance does not change, the warning signal will sound less loud- ly after a few seconds. If the continuous signal sounds, the volume will re- main constant.

When the vehicle moves away from the obstacle, the beeping sound au- tomatically switches off. On approaching the obstacle again, the beeping sound will automatically switch back on.

Your SEAT dealership can adjust the volume of the warning signals.

Note A fault in the parking distance warning system is indicated through a brief audible warning that is constant for about 3 seconds when switching on for the first time. Check the parking distance warning system at a Specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Optical parking system* (OPS)

Fig. 97 On-screen OPS display: A an obstacle has been detected in the collision zone. B an ob- stacle has been detected in the segment C zone recorded behind the vehi- cle

The optical parking system is an extension of the parking distance warning system page 150.

On the screen of the SEAT Portable System (supplied by SEAT) the area be- hind the vehicle is shown registered by the sensors. Any obstacles are dis- play in relation to the vehicle .

151Driver assistance systems

effect Necessary operations

Switching the display on:

Switching on the page 150 parking distance warning system. The OPS switches on automati- cally.

Switching the display off manually:

Press the button on the Portable Navigation System.

Switching the display off manually:

release reverse gear.

Zones explored

Behind the vehicle Fig. 97 C , the zone analysed reaches a distance of up to 150 cm and around 60 cm to the sides.

Screen display

The image displayed represents the supervised zones in several segments. As the vehicle moves closer to an obstacle, the segment moves closer to the vehicle displayed A or B . When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. Stop the vehi- cle!

Distance from the vehicle to the obstacle

Audible warn- ing

Displayed in colour on the screen: colour of the seg-

ment if an obstacle is recog- nised

behind: approx. 31-150 cm

beeping sound Yellow

behind: approx. 0-30 cm

permanent sound

Red

WARNING

Do not be distracted from the traffic when looking at the screen.

Note SEAT recommends practising using parking distance warning system in a traffic free zone or in a car park to familiarise yourself with the system and its operation.

Note Representation of the registered area on the screen of the portable naviga- tion system may take up to 5 seconds.

Note Note the Instruction Manual provided for the device of the additional infor- mation relating to the Portable Navigation System (supplied by SEAT) page 222.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

152 Driver assistance systems

Cruise control* (Cruise control system - CCS)

Introduction

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to individually maintain the set speed when driving forwards from approx. 20 km/h (15 mph).

The CCS only slows down by reducing the accelerator but not by braking .

Additional information and warnings:

Changing gear page 124

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause accidents and severe injuries if it is not possible to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safety distance.

Do not use the cruise control in heavy traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is insufficient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

Never use the CCS when driving off-road or on unpaved roads.

Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation.

To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time you finish using it.

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions.

When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends to accelerate under its own weight. Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

Control lamp

lights up Possible cause

This cruise control system maintains the set speed of the vehicle.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

153Driver assistance systems

Cruise control system operation

Fig. 98 Turn signal and main beam headlights lever on the left of the steering column: CCS buttons and controls

effect Control position, control operations Fig. 98

Action

Switching on the cruise control sys- tem.

Control B in the position .

The system is switched on. After switching on, no speeds are stored and no regulator has yet been placed.

Switching on the cruise control sys- tem.

Press button A in the area .

The current speed is stor- ed and maintained.

Temporarily switching off the cruise control sys- tem.

Place control B in the po- sition . OR:. Press the brake or clutch pedal.

The cruise control system is switched off temporari- ly. The speed setting will remain stored.

Switching the speed setting back on.

Press button A in the area .

The stored speed is reached again and main- tained.

effect Control position, control operations Fig. 98

Action

Increasing the stored speed (dur- ing CCS setting)

Press the button A in the area briefly to in- crease speed in shot measures of about. 1 km/ h (1 mph) and store. The vehicle accelerates ac-

tively until it reaches the new stored speed.Keep button A pressed in

the area for a long time to continually in- crease speed until releas- ing and storing.

Reducing the stor- ed speed (during CCS setting)

Press the button A in the area briefly to reduce the stored speed in shot measures of about. 1 km/ h (1 mph) and store.

Reduce speed without braking, by interrupting the accelerator until reach- ing the new stored speed.

Keep button A pressed in the area for a long time to continually de- crease stored speed until releasing and storing.

Switching off the cruise control sys- tem.

Control B in the position .

The system is switched off. The stored speed is de- leted.

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle down using the brake pedal and reduce gears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switched off automatically or temporarily:

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

154 Driver assistance systems

If the system detects a fault that could affect the working order of the CCS.

If you increase the stored speed by pressing the accelerator pedal for a certain time.

if the brake or clutch pedal is depressed.

If the gear is changed with the manual gearbox.

If the airbag is triggered.

155Driver assistance systems

Safety Assist* (City Safety Assist function)

Introduction

The City Safety Assist function covers driving situations at a distance of about 10 metres in front of the vehicle, in a speed range of approximately 5-30 km/h (3-19 mph).

When the system detects a possible collision with a vehicle in front, the ve- hicle prepares for a possible emergency braking .

If the driver does not react to an imminent collision, the system can auto- matically brake the vehicle in order to reduce speed faced with a possible collision. The system can help to reduce the consequences of an accident.

If the City Safety Assist function determines that the driver braked insuffi- ciently faced with an imminent collision, the system can increase the brake force in order to reduce speed. The system can help to reduce the conse- quences of an accident.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Centre console, lower section page 12

Instrument panel page 15

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the City Safety Assist system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and by the system itself. The increased comfort offered by the City Safety Assist system should never prompt you to take risks. The driver always assumes the responsibility of braking in time.

The City Safety Assist function can not individually prevent accidents, nor serious injury.

The City Safety Assist system may carry out unwanted brake interven- tions in complex driving situations e.g. when a vehicle crosses at a short distance.

WARNING

Including the role of the City Safety Assist system in driving conduct may cause accidents and serious injury. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation.

The City Safety Assist function does not react to people, animals or vehicles that cross or move in the opposite direction in the same lane.

If after switching on the City Safety Assist function the vehicle begins to move, slow the vehicle with the foot brake.

CAUTION If you suspect that the laser sensor of the City Safety Assist function is dam- aged, switch off the City Safety Assist function. This will avoid additional damage.

Any reparation of the laser sensor requires specialist knowledge. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

156 Driver assistance systems

Note If the City Safety Assist function activates a brake, the brake pedal range is reduced. This makes the brake pedal seem harder.

Note Automatic brake intervention by the City Safety Assist function can be can- celled by pressing the clutch pedal, the accelerator pedal or by a corrective intervention.

Note During the automatic braking by the City Safety Assist function you may hear unusual noises. This is normal and is produced in the brakes system.

Warning and control lamps

The City Safety Assist function is switched on every time the ignition is switched on. No special indication is produced.

If the City Safety Assist function is switched off, functions or there is an error in the system, this will be shown by a control lamp on the instrument panel display.

lights up Possible cause Solution

The City Safety Assist func- tion has been switched on manually using the button Fig. 101.

The control lamp turns off after about 5 seconds.

flashes Possible cause Solution

fast: The City Safety Assist system function brakes auto- matically or has braked auto- matically.

Control lamp turns off automati- cally.

slow: City Safety Assist func- tion is not currently available.

If the vehicle is stopped, switch off the engine and switch it on again. If necessary, inspect the laser sensor (dirt, frozen) in Laser sensor on page 157. If it still does not function, refer to a Specialised workshop to have the system inspected.

within the operating area of 5-30 km/h (3-19 mph): The City Safety Assist function has been switched off man- ually using the button

Fig. 101.

Switch on the City Safety Assist function manually using the but- ton Fig. 101.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

157Driver assistance systems

Laser sensor

Fig. 99 In the wind- screen: City Safety Assist function laser sensor

Fig. 100 Laser sensor detection area

A laser sensor on the windscreen Fig. 99 allows the system to detect driv- ing situations in front of the vehicle.

Vehicles ahead can be detected up to a distance of about 10 m.

WARNING

The laser beam on the laser sensor can produce serious injuries to the eyes.

Never focus optical devices, e.g. a camera, a microscope or a magnify- ing glass closer than 100 mm from the laser sensor.

Note that the laser beam can stay active when the City Safety Assist system is switched off or unavailable. The laser beam is not visible to the human eye.

CAUTION If the windscreen is dirty or frozen in the area of the laser sensor, e.g. due to rain, mist or snow, the City Safety Assist system may subsequently fail to operate.

Always keep the laser sensor area free of dirt and freezing.

Use a small brush to remove snow and a de-icer spray to remove ice.

CAUTION A damaged windscreen in the laser sensor area may cause the City Safety Assist function to fail to operate.

Replace the windscreen if it is scratched, cracked or chipped by stones in the laser sensor area. Only use a windscreen authorised by SEAT. Carrying out repairs is not permitted (e.g. in the case of damage suffered in an im- pact from a stone).

When replacing the windscreen wipers, only use windscreen wipers au- thorised by SEAT.

Do not paint the laser sensor area on the windscreen, or cover it with ad- hesives, or sedimentation, etc.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

158 Driver assistance systems

Function

Fig. 101 In the lower part of the centre con- sole: Button for the City Safety Assist function

Switching on and off the City Safety Assist function

Press the Fig. 101 button on the centre console.

When the City Safety Assist function is switched on, the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel within the operational range, i.e. for speeds between 5-30 km/h (3-19 mph).

Switch off the City Safety Assist function in the following situations

Switching off the City Safety Assist function is recommended in the follow- ing situations :

While the vehicle is being towed.

If the vehicle has been taken to an automatic car wash.

If the vehicle is above a test bed.

If the laser sensor is faulty.

After the laser sensor has been involved in a collision.

When driving off road (overhanging branches).

If objects are protruding above the bonnet, e.g. a load carried on the roof that protrudes at the front.

If the windscreen is damaged in the laser sensor area.

WARNING

Failure to switch off the City Safety Assist function in the above situa- tions, may result in accidents and serious injury.

Switch off the City Safety Assist function in critical situations.

159Driver assistance systems

Special driving situations

Fig. 102 A: Vehicle on a bend. B: Motorcyclist driving ahead out of range of the laser sensor

Fig. 103 Other vehicles changing lanes

The City Safety Assist function has physical limits, and has limits deter- mined by the system itself. In certain circumstances, this may produce reac- tions from the City Safety Assist system, that are late or unexpected by the driver. For this reason, always pay due attention and if necessary, intervene.

For example, the following driving situations require special attention:

Driving through a bend

When entering or leaving a long bend, the vehicle may decelerate when the laser sensor detects a vehicle travelling in the opposite lane Fig. 102 A. To interrupt the deceleration you can accelerate, turn the steering wheel or press the clutch.

Narrow vehicles in front

The laser sensor will only detect narrow vehicles in front if they are in the sensor detection zone Fig. 102 B. This applies especially to narrow vehi- cles such as motorbikes.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles changing lane in close proximity can cause an unexpected brake from the City Safety Assist system Fig. 103. To interrupt the deceleration you can accelerate, turn the steering wheel or press the clutch.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

160 Driver assistance systems

Malfunction in the laser sensor

If the laser sensor operation is impaired, for example due to heavy rain, spray, snow or dirt, the City Safety Assist system function is temporarily switched off. On the instrument panel display the control lamp flashes.

When the fault in the laser sensor has been rectified, the City Safety Assist system function automatically becomes available. The control lamp switches off.

The following conditions could prevent the City Safety Assist system from functioning:

Tight bends.

Accelerator pressed all the way down to the floor.

If the City Safety Assist system is switched off or there is a fault page 156.

If the laser sensor is dirty, covered or overheated page 157.

In the event of snow, heavy rain or dense fog.

If there are vehicles in front.

Vehicles changing lanes.

Vehicles moving in the opposite direction in the same lane.

Very dirty vehicles with a low degree of reflection.

Presence of thick dust.

Hill hold

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

SEAT information system page 22

Braking, stopping and parking page 134

Vehicle battery page 193

Wheels and tyres page 210

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

Jump starting page 275

WARNING

The smart technology included in the hill hold cannot change the laws of physics. Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the hill hold tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury.

The hill hold is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

The hill hold cannot always keep the vehicle at a standstill on a slope or brake sufficiently when travelling downhill (e.g. on slippery or frozen surfaces).

Warning lamps

lights up Possible cause Solution

The Start-Stop system is ena- bled.

The Start-Stop system is ena- bled but the engine cannot be automatically stopped.

Contact a specialised workshop.

The Start-Stop system cannot start the engine.

Start the engine by hand using the vehicle's key page 120.

There is a fault in the alternator. page 193

161Driver assistance systems

flashes Possible cause Solution

The Start-Stop system is not available.

Contact a specialised workshop.

Some warning and control lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off after a few sec- onds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle.

Start-Stop system

Fig. 104 At the top of the centre console: Start- Stop system button

With the Start-Stop system enabled, the engine is automatically stopped when the vehicle is at a standstill. It will start again automatically as re- quired.

This function remains enabled while the ignition is switched on. The instru- ment panel display shows information on the current status page 160.

Disconnect the Start-Stop system by hand whenever crossing water.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

When the vehicle is stopped, put it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will stop.

To restart, simply engage the clutch.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

162 Driver assistance systems

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

When the vehicle is at a standstill, depress the brake or keep it pressed down. The engine switches off.

The engine will start again as soon as you release the brake pedal.

With the selector lever set to position P, the engine will not start until a range of gears is selected or the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Important conditions for the engine to stop automatically

The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

The driver door must be closed.

The bonnet must be closed.

The engine must have reached a minimum temperature.

The vehicle must have moved since the last time the engine was stop- ped.

The vehicle's battery must be sufficiently charged.

The battery temperature must not be too low or too high.

The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.

Conditions for the engine to restart automatically

The engine can be automatically restarted in the following cases:

If the vehicle starts to moves.

If the battery voltage drops.

Conditions requiring engine start-up using the key

The engine must be started by hand using the vehicle's key in the following cases:

If the driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.

If the driver door is opened.

If the bonnet is opened.

Switching the Start-Stop system on and off

Press the button situated in the centre console Fig. 104.

The button will light up when the Start-Stop system is switched off.

The engine will start immediately if the vehicle is in Stop mode when the system is switched off by hand.

WARNING

The brake servo and the electromechanical steering do not work when the engine is switched off.

The vehicle must never be allowed to move with the engine switched off.

Disconnect the Start-Stop system before working in the engine com- partment.

CAUTION The vehicle's battery could be damaged if the vehicle is used for long peri- ods at very high outside temperatures.

Note In some cases, it may be necessary to start the engine by hand using the key. Refer to the corresponding control lamp on the instrument panel.

Hill driving assistant*

This function is only included in vehicles with ESC.

The hill driving assistant helps the driver to move off and upwards on a hill when the vehicle is stationary.

163Driver assistance systems

The system maintains brake pressure for approximately two seconds after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from lurching backwards when it is started. During these two seconds, the driver has enough time to release the clutch pedal and accelerate without vehicle moving and without having to use the handbrake, making start-up easier, more comfortable and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

being on a ramp or hill/slope,

closed doors,

vehicle completely stationary,

engine running and foot on the brake,

besides having a gear engaged or being in neutral for manual gear change and with the selector lever at positions S, D or R in vehicles with au- tomatic gearbox.

This system is also active in reversing uphill.

WARNING

If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain condi- tions. Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehi- cle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal down for a few seconds before starting off.

Note The Official Service or a specialist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with this system.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

164 Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning system

Introduction

Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen filter with its activated charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against impurities in the interior ambient air.

For the air conditioner to work with maximum efficiency, the dust and pollen filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Pro- gramme.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollution, the filter must be changed more frequently than sta- ted in the Service Schedule.

Additional information and warnings:

SEAT information system page 22

Windscreen wash system page 89

Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior page 197

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows increases the risk of serious acci- dents.

Ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow and that they are not fogged up preventing a clear view of everything outside.

WARNING (Continued)

The maximum heat output required to defrost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal run- ning temperature. Only drive when you have good visibility.

Always ensure that you use the heating system, ventilation, air condi- tioner and the heated rear window to maintain good visibility.

Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.

Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly resulting in a serious accident.

Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.

CAUTION Switch the air conditioner off if you think it may be broken. This will avoid additional damage. Have the air conditioner checked by a specialised workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

165Air conditioning

Note When the cooling system is turned off, air coming from the outside will not be dried. To avoid fogging up the windows, SEAT recommends leaving the cooler (compressor) on. To do this, press the AC button. The button lamp should light up.

Note The maximum heat output required to defrost windows as quickly as possi- ble is only available when the engine has reached its normal running tem- perature.

Note Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the windows from misting over.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

166 Air conditioning

Controls

Fig. 105 In the centre console: Heating and ventilation system rotary control

Fig. 106 In the centre console: Air conditioning system controls

167Air conditioning

Control button

Additional information. Heating and ventilation system Fig. 105 and air conditioning system Fig. 106.

1

...

Temperature. Rotate the control to adjust the temperature accordingly.

2

...

Air fan. setting 0: Air fan and air conditioning system switched off, set- ting 4: Air fan maximum setting.

3 Air distribution. Rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area.

Heating and ventilation system: defrost function. Distribution of air to the windscreen and the side windows in the exterior rear vision mirror area. Air conditioning system: defrost function. Distribution of air to the windscreen and the side windows in the exterior rear vision mirror area. Press the AC button, increase the air fan speed and switch on the air recirculation page 169 to clear the wind- screen of condensation as soon as possible.

Air distribution towards the body.

Air distribution towards the footwell.

Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Air conditioner: press the button to turn off/on the cooling sys- tem page 167.

4

Air conditioner: sliding control for air recirculation page 169.

Switch off

Turn the air fan switch 2 to position 0.

Heated rear window

The heated rear window button is located on the centre console. The heated rear window only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

WARNING

Never turn off the air fan for a long time or the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver and passen- ger concentration possibly resulting in a serious accident.

Heating and ventilation system user instructions

Temperature

The desired temperature for the interior cannot be lower than that of the ex- terior air temperature, as the heating and fresh air system cannot cool or de- humidify the air.

Setting for conditions of optimal visibility

Set the fan Fig. 105 2 to setting 1 or 2.

Turn the temperature control Fig. 105 1 to the centre position.

Open and direct the air outlets in the dash panel page 169.

Turn the air distribution control Fig. 105 3 to the required position.

User instructions for the air conditioner*

The interior cooling system only works when the engine is running and fan is switched on.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

168 Air conditioning

The air conditioning operates most effectively with the windows closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows briefly.

Setting for conditions of optimal visibility

When the air conditioning is switched on, the temperature and the air hu- midity in the vehicle interior drop. Hence, when the outside air humidity is high, the windows do not mist over and comfort for the vehicle occupants is improved:

Disable air recirculation mode page 169.

Set the fan to the required setting.

Turn the temperature control to the centre position.

Open and direct the air outlets in the dash panel page 169.

Turn the air distribution control to the defrost position.

Press the AC button to turn on cooling. The button will light up.

The cooling system does not switch on

If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on, this may be caused by the following:

The engine is not running.

The fan is switched off.

The air conditioner fuse has blown.

The outside temperature is lower than approximately +2 C (+36 F).

The air conditioner compressor has been temporarily switched off be- cause the engine coolant temperature is too high.

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a speci- alised workshop.

Things to note

If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool under- neath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak!

Note After starting it, any residual humidity in the air conditioner could mist over the windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as soon as possible to clear the windscreen of condensation.

169Air conditioning

Air vents

Fig. 107 Dash panel: Air vents

Air vents

Never close the air vents Fig. 107 A completely to ensure heating, cool- ing and ventilation inside the vehicle.

To open the air vents press the recess with one slat.

Change the air direction by turning the slats.

To close the air vents, fold the slats.

There are additional air vents in the centre of the dash panel and in the foot- well area.

CAUTION Never place food, medicines or other heat-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other heat-sensitive objects may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the air vents.

Air recirculation

Important

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high or very low, selecting manual air recirculation mode for a short period refreshes or heats the interior more quickly.

Switch off air recirculation mode by turning the air distribution control to the position.

Switching the air recirculation mode on and off

Switching on: Move the sliding control Fig. 106 4 to the right to maxi- mum.

Switching off: Move the sliding control Fig. 106 4 as far left as possible.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

170 Air conditioning

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly resulting in a serious accident.

Never use recirculation mode for long periods as it does not refresh the air inside the vehicle.

If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limit- ing visibility.

Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

CAUTION Do not smoke when the air recirculation is activated. The smoke taken in could lie on the cooling system vaporiser and on the dust and pollen filter, leading to a permanently unpleasant smell.

171At the filling station

At the filling station

Filling the tank

Introduction

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the vehicle.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Fuel page 177

Working in the engine compartment page 180

WARNING

Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly can cause an explosion or fire re- sulting in serious burns and injuries.

Always make sure that you correctly close the fuel cap to avoid evap- oration and fuel spillage.

Fuels are highly explosive and inflammable substances that can cause serious burns and injuries.

Fuel could leak out or be spilt if the engine is not switched off or if the filler fuel nozzle is not fully inserted into the tank filler neck when refuel- ling. This could lead to a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

When refuelling, turn off the engine and turn off the ignition for safe- ty reasons.

Always turn off mobile telephones, radio apparatus and other radio wave emitting equipment before refuelling. Electromagnetic waves could cause sparks and lead to a fire.

WARNING (Continued)

Never enter the vehicle while refuelling. If it is absolutely necessary to enter the vehicle, close the door and touch a metal surface before touching the filler nozzle again. This will prevent the generation of static electricity. Sparks could cause a fire when refuelling.

Never handle fuel close to open flames, sparks or objects with slow combustion (e.g. cigarettes).

Avoid static electricity and electro-magnetic radiation when refuel- ling.

Observe the safety regulations of the service station.

Never spill fuel on the vehicle or in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

For safety reasons, SEAT does not recommend carrying a spare fuel canis- ter in the vehicle. Fuel could be spilled and catch fire, above all in case of an accident and this applies to a full container as well as empty contain- ers. This could lead to explosions, fires and injuries.

Observe the following if you exceptionally have to carry fuel in a can- ister:

Never place a fuel container, to fill it, inside the vehicle or on the vehicle, for example, in the luggage compartment. Filling in these cir- cumstances could create an electrostatic charge and spark that could ignite fuel fumes.

Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the fuel nozzle into the neck of the canister as far as possi- ble.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

172 At the filling station

WARNING (Continued)

If you are using a metal fuel canister, the nozzle must always touch the canister while it is being filled to avoid static electricity.

Follow the legal requirements for the use, storage and transport of spare fuel canisters.

Insure that the fuel container complies with manufacturing stand- ards, for example, ANSI or ASTM F852-86.

CAUTION Always remove any fuel spilled anywhere on the vehicle to avoid dam- age to the wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle paintwork.

Refuelling a petrol engine with diesel can cause serious engine and fuel system damage; the resulting malfunctions are not covered by the SEAT warranty. If you refuel with the wrong type of fuel, never start the engine. This applies to even the smallest amount of the wrong fuel. Seek specialist assistance. With the engine running, the composition of the wrong fuel could significantly damage the fuel system and the engine itself.

For the sake of the environment Fuels can contaminate the environment. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

Control lamps and fuel gauge

Fig. 108 On the instru- ment panel: fuel gauge for petrol

Fig. 109 On the instru- ment panel: fuel gauge for petrol and natural gas.

The fuel gauge can vary depending on the vehicle equipment Fig. 108 or Fig. 109.

173At the filling station

lights up Gauge position Fig. 108

Possible cause Solution

a) Red mark (ar-

row)

The fuel tank is almost empty. The reserve tank is being used page 288.

Refuel as soon as possible .

The vehicle is running in natural gas operating mode.

a) This only applies to vehicles with the fuel gauge on the instrument panel Fig. 108.

flashes for about 10 sec-

onds

State of the bars Possible cause Solution

and

the seg- ments re- maininga)

Reserve zone (four small seg-

ments)

The fuel tank is almost empty. The reserve tank is being used page 288.

Refuel as soon as possible .

The vehicle is running in natural gas operating mode.

a) This only applies to vehicles with the fuel gauge on the instrument panel display.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

In natural gas engines

The warning lamp lights up when both fuel types (petrol and natural gas) have reached reserve level.

The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is running in natural gas op- erating mode.

The warning lamp switches off when the natural gas is exhausted. The engine changes to operate with petrol.

Problem: If the vehicle is left parked for a long time immediately after refuel- ling, the gas level indicator does not accurately indicate the same level shown after refuelling when the vehicle is started up again. This is not due to a leak in the system, but to a drop in pressure in the gas tank for techni- cal reasons after a cooling phase immediately after refuelling.

WARNING

Driving with insufficient fuel reserve could result in the vehicle breaking down in traffic and a serious accident.

If the fuel level is too low then the fuel supply to the engine can be- come irregular especially on slopes.

If the engine is choked or stalls due to lack of or irregularity of the fuel supply, the power steering as well as all of the driver assistance sys- tems including braking assistance will stop working.

Always refuel when there is only one quarter of the fuel tank left to avoid running out of fuel.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descriptions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply may lead to ignition faults and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system. This could damage the catalytic converter.

Note The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on the instrument panel Fig. 108 indicates the side of the vehicle on which the tank flap is located.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

174 At the filling station

Refuelling with petrol

Fig. 110 Open tank flap with tank cap attached to the holder

Before refuelling, always turn off the engine, the ignition, mobile tele- phones, auxiliary heating and keep them off during refuelling.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.

Pull the rear zone of the fuel tank flap to open.

Unfold the key shaft if necessary page 28.

Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder of the fuel tank plug and turn the key in an anticlockwise direction.

Take out the fuel tank plug by turning it in an anticlockwise direction and rest it on the upper part of the fuel tank flap Fig. 110.

Refuelling

The correct petrol type for the vehicle is located on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap page 177.

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as soon as the fuel tank is full .

Do not continue to refuel if it is turned off! Otherwise, this will fill the ex- pansion chamber and fuel may leak out if the ambient conditions are warm.

Closing the fuel tank cap

Screw on the fuel tank filler plug in a clockwise direction until it is fully inserted with a click.

Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder of the fuel tank plug, turn the key in a clockwise direction and remove the key.

Press the tank flap until you hear it click into place. The tank flap must be flush with the body contour.

WARNING

Do not continue refilling once the fuel nozzle has switched itself off. The fuel tank may be filled too much. As a result, fuel may spurt out and spill. This could lead to a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

CAUTION Always remove any fuel spilled anywhere on the vehicle to avoid dam- age to the wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle paintwork.

For the sake of the environment Fuels can contaminate the environment. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

175At the filling station

Refuelling with natural gas

Fig. 111 Tank flap open: gas filler mouth 1 , filler mouth retainer 2

Before refuelling, the engine and the ignition, mobile telephone and heat- ing must be switched off separately .

It is also essential to carefully read the instructions for the natural gas pump.

The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling with liquefied natural gas (LNG) . Before refuelling with natural gas, make sure to add the appropriate type of fuel.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth.

Unlock the vehicle with the key or with the central locking button situ- ated on the driver door page 34.

Press on the rear area of the flap and open it.

Refuelling

Problem: If the ambient temperature is very high, the natural gas pump pro- tection against overheating disconnects this automatically.

Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth Fig. 111 1 .

Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas filler mouth.

The fuel tank will be full when the pump compressor automatically cuts the supply.

If you wish to finish refuelling in advance, press the button on the pump to stop the flow.

Closing the fuel tank cap

Check that the gas filler mouth retainer 2 is not trapped with the filler nozzle. If necessary, place it in the filler mouth again.

Insert the plug in the filler mouth.

Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it click into place.

WARNING

Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily flammable substance. Incorrect handling of the natural gas can cause accidents serious burns and other injuries.

Before refuelling with natural gas, the filling mouth must be correctly engaged. If you can smell gas, stop refuelling immediately.

WARNING

The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied natural gas (LNG) and this fuel must not be added under any circumstances. Liquefied natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to explode resulting in serious injury.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

176 At the filling station

Note The filling nozzles of natural gas pumps can differ in the way they are operated. If you are unacquainted with the pump, it is advisable that a member of staff of the service station performs the refuelling operation.

Noises heard when refuelling are normal and do not indicate the pres- ence of a fault in the system.

The vehicle natural gas system is prepared both for refuelling with a small compressor (slow refuel) and a large compressor (fast refuel) in natu- ral gas service stations.

Refilling precautions

Checklist

Never work on the engine or in the engine compartment if you are not famil- iar with the operations to be carried out, the applicable safety standards and if you do not have the instruments, liquids and tools necessary page 180, Working in the engine compartment ! In such a case, have any work carried out by a Specialised workshop. Check the following regularly, preferably when you refuel:

Windscreen washer fluid level page 89

Engine oil level page 185

Engine coolant level page 189

Brake fluid level page 134

Tyre pressure page 210

Vehicle lighting required to guarantee road safety:

Turn signals

Side lights, dipped beam headlights and main beam headlights

Rear lights

Brake lights

Rear fog light page 82

Information on bulb replacement page 266.

177At the filling station

Fuel

Introduction

You will find a factory-fitted sticker containing information on the type of fuel for your vehicle on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

Additional information and warnings:

Booklet Maintenance Programme

Refuelling page 171

Electronic power control and exhaust gases purification system page 237

WARNING

Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly can cause an explosion or fire re- sulting in serious burns and injuries.

Fuel is a highly explosive, easily flammable substance.

Observe current safety instructions and local regulations concerning the handling of fuel.

Types of fuel

The type of fuel to use when refilling will depend on the vehicle's engine. You will find a factory-fitted sticker containing information on the type of fuel for your vehicle on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

SEAT recommends the use of sulphur-free or low sulphur fuel to reduce con- sumption and prevent engine damage.

Possible types of fuel

Alternative names Further information

91a) RON Normal petrol, normal unlea- ded petrol

page 177 95a) RON Premium unleaded petrol (95

RON)

98a) RON Premium unleaded petrol (98 RON)

a) RON = Regulation Octane Number

Petrol

Petrol types

Vehicles with petrol engines must refuel using unleaded petrol according to European norm EN 228 .

Petrol types are categorised according to their octane number (e.g. 91, 95, 98 or 99 RON (RON = Research Octane Number). You may use petrol with a high octane number than the one recommended for your engine. Howev- er, this has no advantage in terms of fuel consumption and engine power.

SEAT recommends refuelling with a low sulphur content or sulphur-free pet- rol to reduce fuel consumption for petrol engines.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behaviour, performance and service life of the engine. This is why the petrol you use should carry suitable addi- tives already included by the petrol industry, free of metals. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system clean and prevent de- posits from building up in the engine.

If good quality petrol with metal-free additives is not available or engine problems arise, the necessary additives must be added when refuelling .

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

178 At the filling station

Not all petrol additives have been shown to be effective. The use of unsuita- ble petrol additives may cause significant damage to the engine and the catalytic converter. Metal additives should never be used. Metal additives may also be contained in petrol additives for improving anti-detonation rat- ings or octane ratings .

SEAT recommends genuine Volkswagen Group fuel additives for petrol en- gines. These additives can be bought at SEAT Authorised Services, where information on how to use them can also be obtained.

CAUTION Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Using them may damage the engine!

Only use fuel with an octane rating that is in line with the norm EN 228, otherwise significant damage could be caused to the engine and fuel sys- tem. Furthermore, it could lead to a loss of performance with the conse- quent engine fault.

The use of unsuitable petrol additives could seriously damage the en- gine and the catalytic converter.

If, in exceptional circumstances, petrol with a lower octane rating to that recommended is used, only use moderate engine speeds and a light throt- tle. Avoid using full throttle and overloading the engine. Otherwise engine damage may occur. Fill up with fuel of a suitable octane rating as soon as possible.

Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or with other metal additives would seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter and could damage it.

Natural gas

Natural gas, in addition to others, can be in liquid form.

Liquefied natural gas (LNG) is the result of heavy cooling of natural gas. Therefore its volume is considerably reduced compared with compressed natural gas (CNG). In vehicles with a natural gas engine, liquefied natural gas cannot be directly refilled, given that the gas would expand excessively in the vehicle gas tank.

Therefore, vehicles with a natural gas engine must only be refuelled using compressed natural gas .

Natural gas quality and consumption

Natural gas is divided into the groups H and L depending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power and inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content than type L. The higher the heating power of the natural gas, the lower the consumption will be.

However, the heating power and the proportion of nitrogen and carbon di- oxide can fluctuate within the quality groups. Therefore, vehicle consump- tion can also vary when using one type of gas only.

The engine management automatically adapts to the natural gas used ac- cording to its quality. Therefore, different quality gases can be mixed in the tank, without the need for comprehensive draining before applying a differ- ent quality gas.

Natural gas and safety

If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a leak :

Stop the vehicle immediately.

Switch the ignition off.

Open the doors to appropriately ventilate the vehicle.

Immediately extinguish cigarettes.

Move away from the vehicle or switch off objects that may cause sparks or a fire.

If you continue to smell gas, do not continue driving!

Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault repaired.

179At the filling station

WARNING

Failure to act when you can smell gas in the vehicle or when refuelling can cause serious injuries.

Carry out the necessary operations.

Leave the danger zone.

If necessary, warn the emergency services.

WARNING

The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied natural gas (LNG) and this fuel must not be added under any circumstances. Liquefied natural gas can cause the natural gas tank to explode resulting in serious injury.

Note The natural gas system must be subject to regular inspections at a special- ised workshop in accordance with the Service Plan.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

180 In the engine compartment

Care, cleaning and maintenance

In the engine compartment

Working in the engine compartment

Introduction

Before working in the engine compartment, make sure that the vehicle is parked on horizontal and firm ground.

The engine compartment of the vehicle is a hazardous area. Never work on the engine or in the engine compartment if you are not familiar with the op- erations to be carried out, the applicable safety standards and especially if you do not have the instruments, liquids and tools necessary ! In such a case, have any work carried out by a Specialised workshop. Negligent work can cause serious injury.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Windscreen wash system page 89

Start and stop the engine page 119

Brake fluid page 134

Checks when filling up page 171

Engine oil page 185

Engine coolant page 189

Vehicle battery page 193

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

If the vehicle moves unexpectedly, this could cause serious injury.

Never work underneath the vehicle if it is not secured against moving. If you must work underneath the vehicle with the wheels in contact with the ground then it should be parked on flat ground, the wheels should be prevented from moving and the key must be removed from the ignition.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. The jack is not intended for this kind of work and its failure could lead to severe injuries.

Disconnect the Start-Stop system.

WARNING

The engine compartment is a dangerous area capable of causing serious injury.

For all type of work, always take the utmost precautions, work care- fully and note the general safety standards in force. Never take personal risks.

Never work on the engine or in the engine compartment if you are not familiar with the necessary operations. If you are not sure about proce- dures then visit a specialised workshop to carry out the necessary work. Incorrect work can cause serious injuries.

181In the engine compartment

WARNING (Continued)

Never open the bonnet if you see steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Hot vapours and coolant can cause serious burns. Always wait until you cannot see or hear the sound of steam or coolant coming from the engine compartment.

Always allow the engine to cool down before opening the bonnet.

Contact with hot elements of the engine and the exhaust system can cause burns.

Once the engine has cooled, follow the instructions below before opening the bonnet:

Engage the handbrake and place the gear selector lever in P or the gear stick in neutral.

Remove the key from the ignition.

Keep children away from the engine compartment and never leave them unsupervised.

When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised. Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray out under pressure causing burns and seri- ous injury.

After cooling, carefully and slowly unscrew the cap anticlockwise, gently pressing down on it.

Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant and steam using a large, thick cloth.

When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them on parts of the engine and the exhaust system. Spilled liquids could cause a fire.

WARNING

The high voltages of the electrical system can give electric shocks as well as causing burns and serious injury and possibly even death!

Never cause short circuits in the electrical system. The battery could explode.

To minimise the risk of electric shock and serious consequences while the engine is running or starting the engine, note the following:

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

WARNING

In the engine compartment, there are rotating parts that could cause se- rious injury.

Never place your hands directly on or near the radiator fan. Touching the rotor blades could seriously harm you. The ventilator works accord- ing to the engine temperature and could start suddenly even when the ig- nition is turned off and the key is removed.

If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan etc as well as from the high-voltage ignition system. Always work with the utmost caution.

Always make sure that no parts of your body, jewellery, ties, loose clothing and long hair can be trapped by the rotating parts of the en- gine. Before any work, remove ties and jewellery ( necklaces, etc), tie longhair back and tie all items of loose clothing to your body to make sure that they cannot be trapped by engine components.

Take extreme caution when operating the accelerator and remain attentive. The vehicle could move, even if the handbrake is applied.

Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cloths or tools, in the engine compartment. If any object is left in the engine com- partment, this could cause malfunctions, engine faults and even a fire.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

182 In the engine compartment

WARNING

Refill liquids and certain materials can catch fire easily in the engine compartment, causing a fire and serious injury!

Never smoke.

Never work close to places exposed to flames or sparks.

Never pour service fluids over the engine. These fluid may ignite hot engine parts and cause injuries.

If it is necessary to work on the fuel system or the electrical system, please follow the instructions below:

Always disconnect the vehicle battery.

Never work close to heaters, heat sources or places exposed to flames or sparks.

Always keep a recently serviced and perfectly working fire extin- guisher close by.

CAUTION When refilling or changing service liquids, ensure that you put the liquids into the right tank. Making a mistake when refilling could cause serious malfunctions and damage the engine!

For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to be checked if you see stains, oil or other fluids on the ground. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a pro- fessional to dispose of them.

Preparing the vehicle for work in the engine compartment

Checklist

Carry out the operations below in the order indicated before starting work in the engine compartment :

Park the vehicle on an even and solid surface.

Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a stand- still.

Apply the handbrake firmly page 134.

Move the gear lever into the neutral position page 124.

Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition page 119.

Wait for the engine to cool down.

Always keep children and other people far from the engine compart- ment.

Ensure that the vehicle can not move off unexpectedly.

WARNING

Always complete the operations given in the checklist and observe the general rules of safety.

Ignoring this checklist, drawn up for your own safety, could result in serious injury.

183In the engine compartment

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 112 A: Release lever in the footwell on the driver side B: Release lever on the bonnet

Fig. 113 C: Bonnet securing rod in the bonnet. D: Bon- net supported by the bonnet securing rod

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

184 In the engine compartment

Opening the bonnet

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen .

Pull the release lever 1 in the direction of the arrow Fig. 112 A. The bonnet is released from the lock carrier by a spring mechanism .

Lift the bonnet up slightly while pressing the release lever 2 B in the direction of the arrow to completely open the bonnet.

Take out the bonnet support rod from its clip in the direction of the ar- row 3 C and place it in the corresponding open position 4 D (arrow).

Closing the bonnet

Slightly lift the bonnet .

Take out the bonnet support rod from the opening catch 4 D and insert it into its clip 3 C in the opening catch.

Let the bonnet fall from a height of 30 cm into its clip; Do not apply pres- sure!

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, open it once again and close it correct- ly.

The bonnet is correctly closed when it is flush with the corresponding parts on the bodywork.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could suddenly open while driving leaving the driver without visibility. This could result in a serious acci- dent.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured by the locking mechanism in the lock carrier piece. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.

While driving, if you notice that the bonnet is not correctly closed then stop immediately and close it correctly.

Only open and close the bonnet when there is nobody within its range.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open the bonnet when the windscreen wipers are in place against the wind- screen.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

185In the engine compartment

Engine oil

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Booklet Maintenance Programme

Working in the engine compartment page 180

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Incorrectly handling engine oil can cause injury and serious burns.

Always protect your eyes when handling engine oil.

Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the reach of children.

Engine oil must only be kept closed in its original container. The same applies to use oil until it has been disposed of.

Never store engine oil in empty food containers or bottles as other people may accidentally drink it.

Regular contact with engine oil can be bad for the skin. If you come into contact with engine oil, wash your skin with soap and water.

With the engine running, the engine oil gets extremely hot and can cause severe skin burns. Always wait until the engine has fully cooled.

For the sake of the environment Similar to the other service liquids, spilled engine oil can be bad for the en- vironment. Collect any spilt fluids in suitable containers and dispose of in accordance with legislation and with the utmost respect for the environ- ment.

Warning and control lamps

flashes Possible cause Solution

Engine oil pressure too low.

Stop the vehicle! Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level, and if necessa- ry, refill with page 186. engine oil - If the warning indica- tor flashes although the oil level is correct, do not continue driv- ing or leave the engine running. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. Seek specialist assis- tance.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Engine oil specifications

Replacement engine oil must strictly comply with the specifications.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

186 In the engine compartment

The correct oil must be used to ensure the correct operation and long serv- ice life of the engine. The engine comes with a high-quality multigrade oil that can generally be used all year round.

Only use an engine oil that complies to SEAT standards whenever possible . Only refill engine oil using approved engine oil in accordance with the corresponding SEAT standard (table on page 186). All oils indicated are synthetic multigrade oils.

Engine oils are being continuously further developed. Technical Services are permanently informed of any modifications. SEAT therefore recommends that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.

Engines Specifications of engine oil with a

service dependent on time/dis- tance travelled

44 kW - 55 kW Petrol engines VW 504 00, VW 502 00

CAUTION Only use engine oils whose specifications are expressly approved by SEAT. The use of any other type of engine oil could cause engine damage!

No additives should be used with engine oil. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

Checking the engine oil level and topping up

Fig. 114 Marked engine oil dipstick

Fig. 115 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

Preparations

Park the vehicle on flat ground so that the engine oil reading is correct.

The engine must be hot to be able to check the engine oil level. Stop the engine and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump.

187In the engine compartment

Open the bonnet page 180.

The engine oil filler neck can be recognised by the symbol on the cap Fig. 115 and the dipstick by its coloured handle.

Check the engine oil level

Pull out the dipstick and wipe it on a clean cloth.

Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as it will go. If the dipstick to measure engine oil has a mark, when you reintroduce it this mark should slot into the corresponding groove located on the upper end of the tube.

Remove the dipstick again and check the engine oil level table on page 187.

After reading the oil level, replace the dipstick in the tube completely.

Engine oil topping up ranges

Fig. 114 Operations required depending on the engine oil topping up level:

Area A Do not top up oil .

Area B You can add oil, but keep the level in this zone.

Area C Oil must be added. After topping up the oil level should be in area B .

Adding oil after checking the level

Only add engine oil in small quantities and in steps.

Unscrew the cap from engine oil filler neck on the cylinder head Fig. 115. If you are not sure where the cap is, request help from a special- ist.

Only refill using approved SEAT engine oil in small quantities (no more than 0.5 ltr) page 185.

To avoid adding too much oil, each time you add a quantity, wait until the oil has flowed into the crankcase so that it can be measured with the dipstick.

Check the oil level before adding any more oil. Do not top up with too much engine oil .

When the oil level is in at least the Fig. 114 B zone, insert the dip- stick into the tube fully to avoid engine oil escaping when the engine is run- ning.

After topping up the oil, ensure that the cap is screwed on to the filler neck correctly.

WARNING

Oil could catch fire if it comes into contact with hot engine components. This could lead to a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

Always ensure that after topping of oil, the engine oil filler cap is cor- rectly tightened. This will avoid engine oil spilling onto hot engine parts when the engine is running.

CAUTION If the engine oil level is above the area A do not start the engine. Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise catalytic converter and engine damage may occur.

When refilling or changing service liquids, ensure that you put the liq- uids into the right tank. Making a mistake when refilling could cause seri- ous malfunctions and damage the engine!

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the ex- haust system.

Engine oil consumption

The consumption of engine oil can be different from one engine to another and can vary during the useful life of the engine.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

188 In the engine compartment

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 1 ltr./2000 km. In the case of new vehi- cles, the consumption can exceed this figure over 5000 kilometres. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a journey.

When the engine is working hard, for instance during sustained high-speed motorway cruising in summer, or when climbing mountain passes, the oil level should preferably be kept within area Fig. 114 A .

Changing the engine oil

The engine oil must be changed regularly according to the specifications of the Maintenance Programme.

Due to the problems linked with disposing of used oil and the need for suit- able tools and special knowledge, always visit a specialised workshop to have the engine oil and filter changed. SEAT recommends visiting a Techni- cal Service.

Detailed information on the service intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.

Engine oil additives make new oil darker after the engine has been running for a short period. This is normal and does not mean more frequent oil changes are required.

WARNING

If, in exceptional circumstances, you must change the engine oil yourself, please note the following:

Wear eye protection.

WARNING (Continued)

Always wait until the engine has completely cooled to avoid being burned.

Always keep your arms horizontal when unscrewing the oil drainage bolt so that the oil does not run down your arms when it begins to drain.

Use a suitable and large enough container to collect all of the used oil in the engine.

Never collect engine oil in empty food containers, cans, bottles and other containers as not all people are able to identify engine oil.

Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the reach of children.

For the sake of the environment Before changing the engine oil, find a suitable location or service for proper disposal.

For the sake of the environment Always dispose of engine oil with the utmost respect for the environment. Never dispose of used engine oil in places such as a garden, woods, drains, roads, paths, rivers and drainage systems.

189In the engine compartment

Engine coolant

Introduction

Never work on the engine cooling system or if you are not familiar with the operations to be carried out, the applicable safety standards and especially if you do not have the instruments, liquids and tools necessary ! In such a case, have any work carried out by a Specialised workshop. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a Technical Service.

Negligent work can cause serious injury.

Additional information and warnings:

Working in the engine compartment page 180

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Engine coolant is toxic!

Only keep engine coolant in its original container, tightly shut and in a safe place.

Never store engine coolant in empty food containers or bottles as other people may accidentally drink it.

Always keep engine coolant out of reach of children.

Ensure that the proportion of engine coolant additive corresponds to the lowest outside temperature to which the vehicle will be exposed.

If the outside temperature is extremely low, the engine coolant could freeze causing the vehicle to stop. As this would also cause the heating to stop working, vehicle occupants without sufficient clothing could freeze.

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. Collect any spilt fluids in suitable containers and dispose of in accordance with legislation and with the utmost respect for the environment.

Coolant warning lamp

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

lights up

Possible cause Solution

Excessive engine coolant temperature.

Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as pos- sible. Switch off the engine and let it cool.

Insufficient engine cool- ant level.

Stop the vehicle! Check the engine coolant when the en- gine has cooled and, if it is low, refill with engine coolant page 191.

Engine coolant system faulty.

Do not drive any further. Obtain professional assistance.

flash- es

Possible cause Solution

Engine coolant system faulty.

Seek specialist assistance.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

190 In the engine compartment

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Always observe any lit warning lamps.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Note On the display of the Portable Navigation System (supplied by SEAT) page 222 an engine coolant temperature gauge can be seen.

Engine coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially trea- ted mixture of water and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13 (TLVW 774 J). The engine coolant additive is recognisable by its purple colour. This mix- ture of water and additive gives the necessary frost protection down to -25 C (-13 F) and protects the light alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boiling point of the coolant.

To protect the engine cooling system, the percentage of additive must al- ways be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is not required.

If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of additive can be increased. However, the percentage of additive should not

exceed 60 %, as this would reduce the frost protection and, in turn, de- crease the cooling capacity.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and, at least, 40 % of the G 13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anticorrosion protection . The mixture of G 13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or G 11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significantly reduce the anticorrosion protection and should, therefore be avoided .

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may fail leading to serious damage.

Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with re- spect to the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehicle is to be used.

When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle would be immobilised. In this case, the heating would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to the engine and the engine cooling system.

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indicates that the G 13 additive has been mixed with an inade- quate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to the environment.

191In the engine compartment

Checking the engine coolant level and refilling

Fig. 116 In the engine compartment: Marking on coolant expansion tank

Fig. 117 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap

If the coolant level is low, the coolant warning indicator will light.

Preparations

Park the vehicle on even, flat and firm ground.

Allow the engine to cool .

Open the bonnet page 180.

The coolant expansion tank is easily recognisable because of the sym- bol on the cap Fig. 117.

Checking the engine coolant level

When the engine is cold, check the coolant level using the side marking on the expansion tank Fig. 116.

If the level is below the MIN mark, top up with coolant. When the en- gine is hot it may be slightly above the marked area.

Topping up the engine coolant level

Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant and steam using a large, thick cloth over the coolant expansion tank cap.

Remove the cap very carefully .

Only refill using new engine coolant according to SEAT specifications (page 190) .

The engine coolant level should be between the marks on the coolant expansion tank Fig. 116. Do not exceed the top level of the marked area .

Screw on the cap tightly.

If, the event of an emergency, you have no coolant that is compliant to the required specifications (page 190), never use another type of addi- tive. Instead, first top up with distilled water only. Then re-establish the correct proportion of the mixture with the correct additive as soon as possible page 190.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

192 In the engine compartment

WARNING

Hot vapours and coolant can cause serious burns.

Never open the coolant expansion tank if steam or coolant is coming from the engine compartment. Wait until you cannot see or hear any steam or coolant escaping.

Always wait until the engine has completely cooled before very care- fully opening the expansion tank cap. Contact with hot elements of the engine can cause skin burns.

Once the engine has cooled, follow the instructions below before opening the bonnet:

Engage the handbrake and place the gear selector lever in P or the gear stick in neutral.

Remove the key from the ignition.

Keep children away from the engine compartment and never leave them unsupervised.

When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised. Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray out under pressure causing burns and seri- ous injury.

Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap anticlockwise, gently press- ing down on it.

Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant and steam using a large, thick cloth.

When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them on parts of the engine and the exhaust system. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. Under specific cir- cumstances, the ethylene glycol can catch fire.

CAUTION Top up with distilled water only. Any other type of water may lead to con- siderable rusting in the engine due to its chemical components. This could consequently damage the engine. If you have not used distilled water but another type of water to top up the coolant, a specialised workshop must immediately replace all of the fluid in the engine cooling system.

Only top up coolant to the top level of the marked area Fig. 116. Oth- erwise the excess coolant will be forced out of the cooling system when the engine is hot, causing damage.

If a lot of liquid coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down completely before adding coolant. Extensive coolant loss is an indication of leaks in the engine cooling system. Have the engine cooling system inspec- ted immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise engine damage may occur.

When refilling or changing service liquids, ensure that you put the liq- uids into the right tank. Making a mistake when refilling could cause seri- ous malfunctions and damage the engine!

193In the engine compartment

Vehicle battery

Introduction

The battery is a component of the vehicle's electrical system.

Never work on the electrical system without fully understanding the opera- tions required, the applicable safety standards and without the correct tools ! In such a case, have any work carried out by a Specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service. Negligent work can cause serious injury.

Location of the vehicle battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment.

Explanation of the warning indications on the vehicle's battery

Symbol Meaning

Wear eye protection!

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Always wear protective gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited.

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Additional information and warnings:

Booklet Maintenance Programme

Working in the engine compartment page 180

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Working on the vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause corro- sion, fire and electric shocks. Always read and take into account the fol- lowing warnings and safety standards before carrying out any work:

Before working on the battery, switch off the engine, the ignition and all electrical devices then disconnect the negative connection on the bat- tery.

Keep children away from acid and the battery itself!

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. It can burn skin and cause blindness. When handling the battery, protect yourself from splashes of acids, above all your hands, arms and face.

Do not smoke and never work close to places exposed to flames or sparks.

Avoid sparks and electrostatic discharges when working with cables and electrical devices.

Never short the battery terminals.

Never use a damaged battery. It can explode. Replace a damaged bat- tery immediately.

Replaced damaged or frozen batteries as soon as possible. A flat bat- tery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0 C (+32 F).

CAUTION Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the en- gine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic com- ponents.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the car is left standing for long periods, protect the battery from ex- treme cold temperature so that it does not freeze up and become dam- aged.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

194 In the engine compartment

Warning lamp

lights up

Possible cause Solution

Faulty generator.

Contact a specialised workshop. Have the electrical system checked. Disconnect any unnecessary electrical consumers. The gener- ator does not charge the battery while the vehicle is in motion.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

CAUTION Failure to heed the warning lamps when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Checking the electrolyte level of the vehicle battery

Fig. 118 In the engine compartment: Remove the cover from the vehi- cle's battery

The battery's electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries. Other batteries do not re- quire maintenance.

Vehicles fitted with the Start-Stop system are equipped with special batter- ies. For technical reasons, the electrolyte level cannot be checked in these batteries.

Preparations

Prepare the vehicle for work in the engine compartment page 180

Open the bonnet page 180.

Press on the tabs Fig. 118 (arrows) in the direction of the arrows and lift the battery cover up.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

Make sure there is sufficient lighting to clearly recognise the colours. Never use open flames or sparklers as a light source.

Depending on the level of acid, the Magic eye on the top of the battery will change colour.

195In the engine compartment

Colour indicator Necessary operations

light yellow or col- ourless

The electrolyte level of the vehicle's battery is too low. Have the battery checked and, where applicable, re- placed by a specialised workshop.

black The electrolyte level of the vehicle's battery is correct.

WARNING

Working with the vehicle battery involves a risk of corrosion, explosions and electric shock.

Always wear protective gloves and eye protection.

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. It can burn skin and cause blindness. When handling the battery, protect yourself from splashes of acids, above all your hands, arms and face.

Never tilt the vehicle battery. Battery acid could spill out of the open- ings to release gases and cause corrosion damage.

Never open the vehicle battery.

If battery acid splashes on you, immediately rinse your eyes and skin abundantly with water for several minutes. Then seek medical care imme- diately.

If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately.

Charging, replacing and connecting or disconnecting the battery

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled environment . SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features. If the battery must be replaced, consult a Tech- nical Service for information on electromagnetic compatibility, the size and maintenance, performance and safety requirements of the new battery in your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT recommends you have the bat- tery replaced by a Technical Service.

Use only maintenance-free genuine batteries conforming to TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73 Standards. These standards must be dated April 2008 or later.

Vehicles fitted with the Start-Stop system are equipped with a special bat- tery. Therefore, this battery must only be replaced by another of the same specifications.

Disconnecting the vehicle's battery

If you must disconnect the battery from the electrical system, please note the following:

Switch off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

The vehicle must be unlocked before disconnecting the battery, other- wise the alarm will be triggered.

First disconnect the negative cable and then the positive .

Connecting the vehicle's battery

Before reconnecting the battery, switch off the engine, the ignition and electric devices.

First reconnect the positive cable and then the negative .

Different control lamps may light up after connecting the battery and switch- ing the ignition on. They will be turned off after a short trip at a speed of between 15 - 20 km/h (10 - 12 mph). If the warning indicators remain lit, please visit a specialised workshop to have the vehicle checked.

If the battery has been disconnected for a long time, it is possible that the next service date is not displayed or calculated correctly page 17. Respect

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

196 In the engine compartment

the maximum service intervals permitted Booklet Maintenance Programme.

Automatic consumer disconnection

The intelligent vehicle electrical system automatically implements a range of measures to prevent the battery from discharging when high demands are made on it:

the idling speed is increased so that the alternator provides more elec- tricity.

where necessary, the power of the most powerful consumers is reduced or even completely disconnected.

On starting the engine, the power supply from the 12-volt socket and the cigarette lighter may be interrupted for a short time.

The on-board management program cannot always prevent the battery from running flat. For example, if the ignition is left on for a long period with the engine off or if the side lights or parking lights are left on while the vehicle is stationary.

Why the battery runs flat:

When stationary for a long time without starting the engine, particularly if the ignition is switched on.

Use of electrical consumers with the engine switched off.

WARNING

Incorrectly securing the battery or using the wrong battery can cause short-circuits, fire and serious injuries.

Always use only maintenance free batteries, protected to prevent a leak, and whose properties, specifications and size correspond to the standard battery.

WARNING

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge.

The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

Never charge a frozen or recently thawed battery. A flat battery can al- so freeze at temperatures close to 0 C (+32 F).

Always replace a battery which has frozen.

Battery cables not correctly connected may cause a short circuit. Re- connect first the positive cable and then the negative cable.

CAUTION Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the en- gine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic com- ponents.

Never plug accessories supply current, such as solar panels or a battery charger, to the 12-volt socket or the cigarette lighter. This could damage the vehicle's electrical system.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the battery in an environment-friendly manner. Batteries contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead.

For the sake of the environment Battery acid can contaminate the environment. Collect any spilt service flu- ids and allow a dispose of them correctly.

197Vehicle care and maintenance

Vehicle care and maintenance

Care and cleaning the vehicle exterior

Introduction

Regular maintenance and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

Products suitable for the care of your vehicle are available at any Technical Service.

Additional information and warnings:

Working in the engine compartment page 180

Care and cleaning of the vehicle interior page 205

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Car-care products may be toxic and hazardous. If car care products are not suitable or are used inappropriately, this could result in accident, se- rious injury, burns or intoxication.

Car care products must always be stored in the original container which should be kept closed.

Observe information provided by the manufacturer.

To prevent confusion, never store car care products in empty food cans, bottles or other containers.

Keep all care products out of reach of children.

WARNING (Continued)

Harmful vapours may be produced when using car care products. Therefore, care products should only be used in well-ventilated spaces or in the open air.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, acetone or any other volatile liquid to wash, clean or care for the vehicle. These are toxic and highly flammable.

WARNING

Inappropriate care and cleaning of vehicle components may effect the ve- hicle safety equipment, increasing the risk of severe injury.

Vehicle components should only be cleaned and maintained in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Only use approved or recommended care products.

CAUTION Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle in areas allocated for this purpose, to prevent dirty water which may be contaminated by oil, grease or fuel, from entering the drains. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.

For the sake of the environment Where possible, always use products which respect the environment.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

198 Vehicle care and maintenance

For the sake of the environment The remains of car care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. Observe information provided by the manufacturer.

Washing the vehicle

The longer substances such as insects, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive ma- terials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance due to strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect. The vehicle undercarriage should also be thoroughly wash- ed at regular intervals.

Automatic car washes

Always observe the instructions provided at the automatic car wash. The standard precautionary measures prior to entering the car wash should be taken to avoid damage to the vehicle (close all windows, fold in exterior mir- rors). If the vehicle is fitted with additional components (spoiler, roof-rack, aerial...), check with the car wash supervisor whether these can enter the car wash .

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, wear and dam- age to the paintwork will depend on the type of car wash used. SEAT recom- mends the use of car washed without brushes.

To remove traces of wax on windows and to prevent wiper blades from scratching, please observe the following page 200, Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors.

Washing the car by hand

When washing the car by hand, use plenty of water to soften the dirt first, and rinse off as well as possible.

Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, glove or brush using only slight pressure. Start at the roof and work downwards. Special car shampoo should only be used for very persistent dirt.

Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and often.

Wheels, sills and similar should be cleaned last. Use a second sponge for this.

WARNING

Sharp components on the vehicle may cause injury.

Protect arms and hands from sharp edges when cleaning the vehicle undercarriage or the interior of the wheel hubs.

WARNING

After the vehicle has been washed, the braking effect will be reduced (and the braking distance increased) due to moisture (and ice in winter) on the brakes.

Dry the brakes and remove ice by braking carefully. Ensure that you are not endangering other road-users or breaking traffic regulations in the process.

CAUTION The temperature of the water must not exceed +60 C (+140 F).

To avoid damage to the paintwork, do not wash the vehicle in full sun.

Do not use rough sponges or similar which could damage the surface to clean away the traces of insects.

Never wipe the headlights with a dry cloth or sponge, always moisten first. It is best to use soapy water.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: When washing the vehicle with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof. Locks and seals could freeze!

199Vehicle care and maintenance

CAUTION To prevent damage to the vehicle, please observe the following before en- tering an automatic car wash:

Compare the distance between the vehicle wheels and the distance be- tween the guide-rails of the car wash to prevent damage to the wheels and tyres!

Switch off the rain sensor before taking the vehicle to an automatic car wash.

Compare the height and width of your vehicle with the available height and width when entering and driving through the car wash.

Fold in exterior mirrors Electrically retractable exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand. Always use the electrical power control.

To avoid damaging the bonnet paintwork, rest the windscreen wipers on the windscreen after drying the wiper blades. Do not let them fall!

Lock the rear lid to prevent it from opening unexpectedly while inside the car wash.

Washing the vehicle with high pressure cleaning apparatus

When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, always follow the operating instructions for the equipment. Pay special attention to the re- quired pressure of the jet and the distance between the jet and the vehicle .

Keep a suitable distance from soft materials, such as rubber hoses or insu- lating material, and from the parking distance warning system sensors. The sensors of the parking distance warning system are situated on the rear bumper .

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt .

WARNING

The incorrect use of high pressure cleaning equipment could result in permanent damage, visible or invisible, to the tyres or other materials. This could result in a serious accident.

Ensure there is a suitable distance between the nozzle and the tyres.

Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet or so-called dirt blasters. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, you may dam- age the tyres.

WARNING

After the vehicle has been washed, the braking effect will be reduced (and the braking distance increased) due to moisture (and ice in winter) on the brakes.

Dry the brakes and remove ice by braking carefully. Ensure that you are not endangering other road-users or breaking traffic regulations in the process.

CAUTION The temperature of the water must not be above +60 C (+140 F).

To avoid damage to the paintwork, do not wash the vehicle in full sun.

To ensure that the system functions well, the sensors located on the bumper must be kept clean and free from ice. When cleaning with pressure hoses and steam cleaners, the sensors should be sprayed only briefly. A distance of 10 cm between the sensors and the steam / hose nozzle must be observed.

Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from windows

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: When washing the vehicle with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof. Locks and seals could freeze!

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

200 Vehicle care and maintenance

Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors

Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors

Spray windows and exterior windows with a standard window cleaner con- taining alcohol.

Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth. The cha- mois leathers used on painted surfaces are not suitable for cleaning win- dows because they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the win- dows.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone deposits off .

Removing wax deposits

Automatic car washes and certain car care products may leave wax deposits on the windows. These deposits can only be removed with a special product or cleaning cloths. If wax deposits are left on the windscreen and the rear window, the blades can scratch the glass. SEAT recommends you wipe the wax deposits off the windscreen and the rear window with a soft cloth each time after you have washed the vehicle.

A window cleaning detergent which helps to dissolve the wax may be added to the windscreen washer fluid to prevent the wiper blades from scratching the windscreen. Please ensure the you add the cleaning product in the cor- rect proportions. Products for removing grease do not eliminate the wax de- posits .

Special cleaning products or window cloths are available at any Technical Service. To remove wax deposits, SEAT recommends the following products:

For the hottest time of the year: the window cleaner for summer use G 052 184 A1. Proportion 1:100 (1 part detergent, 100 parts water) in the windscreen washer reservoir.

All year round: the window cleaner G 052 164 A2; proportion 1:2 in windscreen washer reservoir (1 part concentrate, 2 parts water) in winter, up to -18 C (-0.4 F), or 1:4, during the rest of the year.

Window cloths G 052 522 A1 for all windows and exterior mirrors.

Removing snow

Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and exterior mirrors.

Removing ice

If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one direction only without swinging it. If you pull the scraper backwards, the dirt may scratch the window.

WARNING

Dirty or misted windows reduce visibility in all directions and increase the risk of accident and serious injury.

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

Remove ice and snow from the windows and demist inside and out.

CAUTION Never mix our cleaning products with other products not recommended by SEAT in the windscreen washer reservoir. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen washer jets.

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the windows and exterior mirrors. The glass could crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the window. Do not stick adhesive labels over the heating elements and never clean the inside of the rear window with corrosive or acid products or other similar chemical cleaning products.

201Vehicle care and maintenance

Cleaning and changing windscreen wiper blades

Fig. 119 Changing the front wiper blades

Fig. 120 Changing the rear wiper blade

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graph- ite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If the graph- ite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the wind- screen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty .

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. Wiper blades are available from specialised workshops.

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms

The wiper arm may only be lifted at the point where it is fastened to the blade.

For windscreen wipers, please note: the wiper should be in service position before unfolding it page 89.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms.

Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades.

If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms.

Hold down the release button Fig. 119 1 while gently pulling the blade in the direction of the arrow.

Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place.

Rest the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.

Changing the rear wiper blade

Lift the windscreen wiper arm and fold it at an angle of approximately 60 Fig. 120.

Press and hold the release button 1 .

Fold the wiper blade towards the windscreen wiper arm Fig. 120 (ar- row A ) while simultaneously pulling in the direction of arrow B . This may require some strength.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

202 Vehicle care and maintenance

Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the windscreen wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow B and hook into place. This fea- ture is operational when the knob is in position (arrow A ).

Return the windscreen wiper arm to the windscreen. Do not let it simply drop down!

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of acci- dent and serious injury.

Always replace damaged or worn blades or blades which do not clean the windscreen correctly.

CAUTION Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass.

If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the blades, the graphite layer will be damaged.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows.

Note If wax deposits, other cleaning products from the automatic car wash, or other care products, are left on the windscreen and the rear window, the blades can scratch the glass. Remove wax deposits with a special product or cleaning cloths.

Caring for and polishing the vehicle paintwork

Waxing

Regular waxing protects the paintwork. It is time to apply a good coat of wax when water no longer forms droplets and rolls off the clean paintwork.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the automatic car wash, SEAT rec- ommends protecting the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss can- not be brought back by applying wax.

If the polish does not contain wax, a wax product should be applied after polishing.

CAUTION To prevent damage, car polish or hard wax should not be used on com- ponents painted in matt paint, plastic components and the glass headlamp and tail light covers.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Care and cleaning of chrome and aluminium wheel rims

Use a clean, damp, lint-free, smooth cloth to clean anodized surfaces.

If there is a lot of dirt, use a special cleaning product which does not contain solvents.

Then, polish the chrome and aluminium wheel trims with a smooth dry cloth.

CAUTION In order to prevent damage to the aluminium and chrome wheel trims:

Do not clean or polish them in direct sunlight.

Do not clean or polish them in sandy or dusty environments.

Do not use abrasive cleaning agents such as home cream cleaners.

Do not use insect sponges, scouring pads, or similar products to clean insect deposits.

203Vehicle care and maintenance

Do not polish dirty surfaces.

Do not use products containing solvents.

Do not use hard wax.

CAUTION Chrome hub caps or wheel covers may have been painted additionally. Do not treat them with aluminium or chrome wax products, nor chrome or alu- minium polish. Instead, use commercial paint wax or polish.

Cleaning wheels

Cleaning steel wheels

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Therefore, clean wheels reg- ularly with a separate sponge.

Any damage to the paint on steel wheels should be touched up before the metal starts to rust.

Caring for and cleaning alloy wheels

Remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels approximately once a fortnight. Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims. SEAT recommends treating the wheel rims thoroughly with a hard wax about once every three months.

It is important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims. Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used for maintaining the rims.

If the protective coating on the paint has been damaged (for example, hit by a stone), it should be repaired immediately.

Caring for rubber seals

The rubber seals on doors, windows, etc., remain flexible, provide a better seal and last longer if they are regularly treated with a product specifically designed for use on rubber.

Before applying the product, use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

De-icing the door lock cylinder

To de-ice the lock cylinders, SEAT recommend the use of genuine SEAT spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive properties.

CAUTION The use of products containing degreasing agents to de-ice the locks may rust the lock cylinder.

Protection of vehicle undercarriage

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical and mechanical damage. The protective coat on the undercarriage may wear through use while driving. Therefore, SEAT recommends that the protective coating on the undercarriage and on the running gear should be regularly checked, and repaired if necessary.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

204 Vehicle care and maintenance

WARNING

Additional underseal or anti-corrosion products could catch fire due to the high temperatures reached by the exhaust gas system and other en- gine components.

Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion products to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, heat shields or other parts of the ve- hicle which reach high temperatures.

Cleaning the engine compartment

The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially hazardous area page 180.

The engine compartment should only be cleaned by qualified personnel. If it is not correctly cleaned, the anti-corrosion coating and consequently elec- trical components may be damaged. Moreover, water may filter directly into the vehicle interior through the water chamber .

If the engine compartment is very dirty, always take the vehicle to a special- ised workshop for professional cleaning. SEAT recommends visiting a Tech- nical Service.

Water box

The water box is in the engine compartment, between the windscreen and the engine, and beneath a perforated cover. Air is taken in through the wa- ter box from outside to the vehicle interior via the heating and air condition- er.

Leaves and other loose objects should be regularly cleaned away from the water box either by hand or with a vacuum.

WARNING

When working on the engine or in the engine compartment, there is a risk of injury, burns, accident or fire.

Before starting work, please ensure you are familiar with the required procedure and the safety precautions page 180.

SEAT recommends you have this work performed by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION If water is manually poured into the water box (for example, using a high pressure cleaning appliance), this could cause significant damage to the ve- hicle.

For the sake of the environment Only wash the engine compartment in areas allocated for this purpose, to prevent dirty water which may be contaminated by oil, grease or fuel, from entering the drains. In some districts, the engine compartment may not be washed outside the wash bays provided for this purpose.

205Vehicle care and maintenance

Caring for and cleaning the vehicle interior

Introduction

The dye from many items of modern clothing (e.g. dark jeans) is not always solid enough. Seat upholstery (material and leather), especially when light- coloured, may visibly discolour if the dye comes out of clothing (even when used correctly). This is not an upholstery defect but indicates that the dye in the item of clothing is not solid enough.

Additional information and warnings:

Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior page 197

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

WARNING

Car-care products may be toxic and hazardous. If car care products are not suitable or are used inappropriately, this could result in accident, se- rious injury, burns or intoxication.

Car care products must always be stored in the original container which should be kept closed.

Observe information provided by the manufacturer.

To prevent confusion, never store car care products in empty food cans, bottles or other containers.

Keep all care products out of reach of children.

Harmful vapours may be produced when using car care products. Therefore, care products should only be used in well-ventilated spaces or in the open air.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, acetone or any other volatile liquid to wash, clean or care for the vehicle. These are toxic and highly flammable.

WARNING

Inappropriate care and cleaning of vehicle components may effect the ve- hicle safety equipment, increasing the risk of severe injury.

Vehicle components should only be cleaned and maintained in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Only use approved or recommended care products.

CAUTION Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialised workshop.

Note Suitable vehicle care products are available from your Technical Service.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

206 Vehicle care and maintenance

Treating your upholstery

Check list

For information on how to treat and care for the vehicle upholstery, please bear the following in mind :

Before entering the vehicle, fasten all Velcro fastenings which could come into contact with upholstery and coverings. If the Velcro fasten- ings on upholstery and material covers are not securely fastened, this could damage them.

To prevent damage, do not allow the upholstery or covers to come into contact with sharp or decorative objects. Decorative objects such as zips, rivets and rhinestones on clothing and belts.

Dust and grit in the pores and seams should be removed regularly to prevent them scratching and damaging the surface.

Always check that the dyes used in clothing are fast to prevent them from staining the upholstery. This is particularly true for clear-col- oured upholstery.

CAUTION Failure to observe the instructions in the check list for caring for your up- holstery could result in damage or discolouration of the upholstery and cov- ers.

Always follow the check list and perform the necessary operations.

Note SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a Specialised workshop to treat any stains on the upholstery caused by the discolouration of clothing.

Padding and fabric trim cleaning

Normal cleaning

Before applying cleaning products, please read the instructions for han- dling and the warnings shown on the container.

The upholstery, textile covers, and carpet should be regularly vacuumed (with vacuum brush).

We recommend that you use a soft sponge or lint-free, micro-fibre cloth for normal cleaning .

General superficial dirt on upholstery and textile covers can be cleaned with a normal foam cleaning product.

If the upholstery and the material trims are very dirty, we recommend you have them cleaned by a specialist cleaning form.

Cleaning stains

It may be necessary to clean the whole surface and not only the stain itself. Especially if the surface has been dirtied through normal use. Otherwise, the stained area may become lighter than the rest of the surface after treat- ment.

207Vehicle care and maintenance

Type of stain Cleaning the vehicle

Water-based stains, e.g. coffee or fruit juice.

Use a sponge and wipe with a solution of water and wool wash. Dry with a dry, absorbent cloth.

Persistent stains, e.g. chocolate or make-up.

Apply a washing pastea) directly to the stain and allow it to work. Apply clean water using a sponge or damp cloth to remove the cleaning product deposits. Dry with a dry absorbent cloth.

Grease-based stains, e.g. oil or lip- stick.

Apply neutral soap or cleaning pastea) and allow it to work. Remove dissolved grease or colour particles with an absorbent cloth. Then apply clean water. Take care not to soak the upholstery.

a) Bile soap can be used as a cleaning paste.

CAUTION Brushes should only be used to clean the mats and floor mat! Other surfa- ces may be damaged if a brush is used.

CAUTION Do not use steam cleaning equipment, as the dirt becomes more encrusted in the material when steam is applied.

CAUTION Never use brushes for cleaning damp material as they could damage the surface.

Cleaning storage compartments, drinks holders and ashtray

Fig. 121 In the front part of the centre console: Storage compartment with cup holder

Fig. 122 Ashtray re- moved and open with area to stub cigarettes

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

208 Vehicle care and maintenance

Cleaning storage compartments and drinks holders

Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to clean parts.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, we recommend using a spe- cial solvent-free plastic cleaning product.

Cleaning the ashtray

Extract the ashtray and empty it.

Clean the ashtray with a dishcloth.

Use a toothpick or similar to remove ash from the area where cigarettes are stubbed out Fig. 122.

Care and cleaning of plastic parts, wooden trim and the instrument panel

Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to clean parts.

Clean plastic parts (inside and outside the vehicle) and the dash panel with a special solvent-free product for the care and cleaning of plastic, ap- proved by SEAT .

Wash wooden trims with a mild soap and water solution.

Clean the Portable Navigation System housing (Supplied by SEAT) with a dry cloth only.

WARNING

Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbag modules to become porous. If an airbag is accidentally triggered, the detachment of plastic parts could cause serious injury.

Never clean the dash panel and the surfaces of the airbag modules with cleaners containing solvents.

CAUTION When cleaning the instrument panel, be careful not to dampen the Portable Navigation System connections as this can damage the electrical installa- tion.

Cleaning seat belts

If the seat belt is very dirty, the belt retractor may not work correctly thus preventing the seat belt from operating correctly.

The seat belts should never be removed from the vehicle for cleaning.

Use a soft brush to remove the worst dirt .

Pull the seat belt right out and leave it out.

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap and water solution.

Wait until they are completely dry.

Only allow the seat belt to retract when it is completely dry.

WARNING

Check the condition of all the seat belts at regular intervals. If the web- bing or other parts of the seat belt are damaged, the vehicle should be taken to a Specialised workshop immediately and the belts should be re- placed. It is extremely dangerous to drive using damaged seat belts and could result in serious injury or loss of life.

Seat belts and their components must never be cleaned with chemi- cal products, nor should they be allowed to come into contact with corro- sive liquids, solvents or sharp objects. This could affect the strength of the seat belt webbing.

209Vehicle care and maintenance

WARNING (Continued)

Seat belts should be completely dry before retracting. Damp could damage the belt retractor so that it is does not operate correctly.

Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to enter the buckle fastenings. This could damage the buckles and seat belts.

Never attempt to repair, modify or remove a seat belt yourself.

Always have damaged seatbelts replaced immediately by seat belts approved for the vehicle in question by SEAT. Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent dam- age. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

210 Vehicle care and maintenance

Wheels and tyres

Introduction

SEAT recommend that all work on tyres and wheels is carried out by a speci- alised workshop. They have the necessary special tools and replacement parts, trained personnel and facilities for disposing of the old tyres. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Additional information and warnings:

Transporting page 95

Braking, stopping and parking page 134

Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior page 197

Notes for the user page 233

Vehicle tool kit page 247

Wheel trims page 250

Change wheel page 252

Tire Mobility Set page 258

WARNING

The vehicle cannot be totally controlled or braked if the tyres (new or used) are worn or damaged.

Incorrect use of wheels and tyres could make driving more dangerous and result in serious accidents and damage.

All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.

New tyres do not give maximum grip and will not have reached their maximum braking capacity to start with, and therefore need running in. To prevent accidents and major damage, extreme caution should be tak- en for the first 600 km (400 miles).

WARNING (Continued)

Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure they are maintained at the pressures indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyres could over- heat, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres.

Never drive on damaged (punctured, cut, cracked or dented) or worn tyres. Driving on damaged or worn tyres could result in burst tyres, seri- ous accidents or damage. Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced im- mediately.

Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.

The effectiveness of driver and brake assist systems also depends on the grip of the tyres.

If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the car immediately and check the tyres and wheels for damage.

To minimise the risk of losing control of the vehicle or causing a seri- ous accident, never undo the bolted joints of beadlock wheels.

Never mount used tyres or wheels if you are not sure of their previous history. They may be damaged, although the damage is not immediately visible.

Old tyres, even if they have never been used, may lose air or burst un- expectedly while driving, especially at high speeds, resulting in serious accident and injury. If tyres are over six years old, they should only be used in an emergency and with extreme caution.

Note For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehicles. In some cases, this may also be true for the same model of wheel. Please refer to the vehicle documentation or ask at a Technical Serv- ice.

211Vehicle care and maintenance

About your tyres and wheels

Fig. 123 Diagram for changing wheels

The tyres of a vehicle are the components which are subjected to most stress and are the most underestimated. Tyres are very important, as the support offered by their narrow surface is the only point of contact between the vehicle and the road.

The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style, the care they receive and the correct fitting.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteris- tics of the vehicle and our critical to good road holding and safe handling.

Avoiding damage to tyres and wheels

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (punctures, cuts, cracks, dents).

Remove any foreign bodies found on the outside of the tread provided they have not passed through the wall of the tyre page 216.

The instructions for tyre control systems should always be observed.

Replace damaged or worn tyres as soon as possible page 216.

Regularly check tyres for non-visible damage page 216.

Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle page 218.

Do not allow tyres (including the spare wheel) to come into contact with aggressive substances, grease, oil, fuel or brake fluid .

Lost valve caps should be replaced immediately.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread page 218. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction of rotation, drive with ex- treme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is of partic- ular importance when the road surface is wet. Change the tyre as soon as possible or remount it with the correct direction of rotation.

Interchanging tyres

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres the wheels should be changed round from time to time according to the system Fig. 123. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the tyres changed.

Tyres that are over 6 years old

Tyres are subject to an ageing process as a result of physical and chemical processes. This may affect their performance. Tyres which are stored for long periods of time without being used, harden and become more fragile than tyres which are in constant use.

SEAT recommends that tyres over six years old are replaced with new tyres. This also applies to tyres (including the spare wheel) which appear to be in

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

212 Vehicle care and maintenance

perfect condition on the outside and which have a tread depth within the values stipulated by the Law .

The date of manufacture, part of the tyre identification number (TIN), indi- cates the age of the tyre () page 218.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of rotation (left, right, forwards, backwards). This ensures you will be able to mount them correctly when you replace them. When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark location. Do not place tyres mounted on the wheel in a vertical position.

Protect tyres not mounted on wheels from dirt by storing them in suitable bags and standing them on the ground on their tread.

WARNING

Aggressive fluids or substances could result in visible or invisible dam- age with the consequent risks.

Always ensure that tyres do not come into contact with chemical products, oil, grease, fuel, brake fluid or other aggressive substances.

WARNING

Old tyres, even if they have never been used, may lose air or burst unex- pectedly while driving, resulting in serious accident or damage.

If tyres are over six years old, they should only be used in an emer- gency and with extreme caution.

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of by qualified personnel according to the laws in the country concerned.

Wheel rims

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly page 252.

For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehicles. In some cases, this may also be true for the same model of wheel.

The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the character- istics of the vehicle and are critical to good road holding and safe handling.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque page 252.

Beadlock wheel rims

Beadlock wheel rims have various components. These are joined together by special bolts using a special procedure. This ensures good performance, a better seal, improved safety and wheel run out. Therefore, worn rims should always be replaced and must only be repaired in a specialised work- shop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service .

Wheel rims with bolted trims

Wheel rims may be fitted with interchangeable trim parts which are attach- ed to the rim using self-locking bolts. Worn trims should only be replaced at a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service .

213Vehicle care and maintenance

WARNING

The use of worn or damaged wheel rims could make driving more danger- ous and result in serious accidents and damage.

Only wheel rims which have been approved for use with your vehicle should be used.

Inspect wheel rims regularly for damage and replace as required.

WARNING

If the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims are not correctly tightened or loosened, this could result in serious accident.

Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims.

Any work relating to wheel rims with bolted rims should be carried out at specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Serv- ice.

Replacement of new tyres and wheel rims

New tyres

When tyres are new, drive with extreme caution for the first 600 km (400 miles), as all tyres need to be run-in. Tyres which have not been run-in do not have such good grip or braking capacity .

All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.

Replacing tyres

Where possible, always replace both wheels on an axle (both wheels on the front axle or both wheels on the rear axle) .

Only replace used tyres with those authorised by SEAT for the corre- sponding type vehicle. Pay special attention to size, diameter, and maxi- mum load and speed capacity.

Never use tyres which are larger than SEAT approved tyres. If the tyres are too big, they may knock or rub against the chassis or other components, resulting in damage.

WARNING

New tyres do not give maximum grip and will not have reached their max- imum braking capacity to start with, and therefore need running in.

To prevent accidents and major damage, extreme caution should be taken for the first 600 km (400 miles).

WARNING

There should be adequate space between the tyres and the vehicle in ac- cordance with the vehicle design. If this is not the case, the tyres may rub against parts of the running gear, chassis or brake lines, leading to faults in the brake system or to tread detachment, and the risk of burst tyres.

The true tyre dimension should not be greater than the dimensions of tyres manufactured and approved by SEAT and should not rub against parts of the vehicle.

Note Although tyres may be shown as being the same size, the true dimensions of different types of tyre may vary with respect to the nominal size, or tread patterns may be different.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

214 Vehicle care and maintenance

Note If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT, you can be sure that the true tyre dimensions will be correct for your vehicle. For other tyre models, the tyre vendor should provide the manufacturer's certificate with the tyre, indicat- ing that this type of tyre is suitable for your vehicle. This certificate should always be carried with the vehicle.

Tyre pressures

Fig. 124 Position of tyre pressure specification plate

The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted at the factory is shown on a label and is valid for summer and winter tyres. This label Fig. 124 is either in the driver door strut or inside the fuel cap.

Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce the life of the tyres considerably and also impair the car's handling . It is essential to maintain the cor- rect tyre pressures, especially if driving at high speeds. Incorrect tyre pres- sure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.

The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a journey.

As a general rule, the pressures given are for cold tyres. When the tyres are hot, the pressures are greater.

Never deflate a hot tyre in order to obtain the required pressure. This could result in very low tyre pressures which may lead to sudden blow-outs.

215Vehicle care and maintenance

Checking tyre pressures

Check tyre pressures only when the vehicle has not been driven for more than a few kilometres at low speeds in the past three hours.

The tyre pressures should be checked regularly, and only when the tyres are cold. Always check all tyres, including the spare wheel. Tyre pressures should be checked more often in colder regions, and only when the vehicle has not been driven recently. Always use a correctly-operating tyre gauge.

Adjust tyre pressures to the loads carried in the vehicle.

After adjusting the tyre pressure, check that the caps are properly screwed.

The spare wheel or temporary spare wheel must be at the maximum pres- sure specified.

WARNING

If tyre pressures are too high or too low, the tyre may deflate or burst suddenly while driving. This could result in a serious accident.

If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyres could overheat, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres.

When driving at high speeds and/or fully loaded, the tyre could sud- denly overheat, burst or be subject to tread detachment, with the resul- tant loss of control of the vehicle.

Tyre pressures which are too high or too low reduce the service life of the tyre, affecting the vehicle's performance.

Tyre pressures should be checked regularly, at least once a month and before long journeys.

Adjust the pressures of all the tyres to the vehicle load.

Never deflate excess pressure from hot tyres.

CAUTION Take care not to tilt the manometer when placing it on the valve. Other- wise, the valve may be damaged.

To avoid damage to the valves, always replace valve caps correctly. Check that the caps are identical to the standard caps and have been cor- rectly tightened.

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase the fuel consumption.

Tread depth and wear indicators

Fig. 125 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators

Tread depth

Certain driving conditions require a deeper tread, as well as needing the tread to be approximately the same on the front and rear tyres. This is par- ticularly important when driving in winter, in cold temperatures and on wet roads .

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

216 Vehicle care and maintenance

The minimum tread depth required by law in the majority of cases is 1.6 mm, measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators. Observe legal requirements in each country.

The performance of winter tyres is much reduced when the tread has worn to 4 mm (5/32 inch).

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.

Wear indicators on the tyre

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high Fig. 125 tread wear indicators running across the tread. A number of these indicators are equal- ly spaced around the tyre tread. Certain marks on the tyre walls (for exam- ple, the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the position of the wear in- dicators.

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is worn. Tyres must always be re- placed before the tyre tread has worn to the level of the indicator.

WARNING

Driving with worn tyres is dangerous, and may lead to loss of control of the vehicle with serious consequences.

Tyres must be replaced before the wear indicators are at the same lev- el as the tread pattern.

Worn tyres have significantly reduced grip, especially on wet surfa- ces, increasing the risk of aquaplaning.

Worn tyres make control of the vehicle more difficult in normal or dif- ficult driving conditions, increasing the braking distance and the risk of skidding.

Damaged tyres

Damage to wheels and tyres is often not immediately visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged .

Slow down immediately if you think you have a damaged wheel.

Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

If tyres are worn, stop driving and seek qualified assistance.

If there is no visible exterior damage, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the vehicle checked.

Foreign bodies in the tyre

Do not remove foreign bodies if they have penetrated through the tyre wall!

You should obtain professional assistance immediately.

Wear of tyres

The wear of tyres depends on a number of factors, for example:

Driving style.

Unbalanced wheels.

Running gear settings.

Driving style: driving round bends fast or sudden acceleration or braking speed up the wear of tyres. When the driving style is normal, if the tyres wear too quickly, have the running gear settings checked at a specialised workshop.

Wheel run-out: The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vibra- tions in the steering wheel. Run-out leads to wear of the steering and sus- pension. In the event of run out, the wheels should be balanced again. When a new wheel is fitted, it should be balanced again.

217Vehicle care and maintenance

Running gear settings: an incorrectly positioned running gear increases the wear of tyres and affects your safety while driving. If tyres wear too quickly, have the wheel alignment checked at a specialised workshop.

WARNING

If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulls to one side while driving, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged.

Reduce speed immediately and stop, while observing the highway code.

Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

Never carry on driving on worn tyres or wheels. Request qualified as- sistance immediately.

If there is no visible exterior damage, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the vehicle checked.

Spare wheel or temporary spare wheel*

Fig. 126 In the luggage compartment: hand con- trolled wheel for securing the spare wheel

Removing the spare wheel

Open the rear lid and lift the luggage compartment shelf page 98.

If necessary, remove the luggage compartment variable floor page 98.

Lift up the carpet from the recess and remove it from the luggage com- partment.

If necessary, take out the vehicle tool kit with the container.

Completely remove the hand controlled wheel from the centre of the spare wheel Fig. 126 by turning it in an anticlockwise direction, and take out the spare wheel.

Storing the replaced wheel

Pull back the carpet.

With the wheel rim facing downwards, situate the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well so that the wheel rim central hole coincides with the open- ing.

Turn the hand controlled wheel with the shank screwed clockwise until the replaced wheel is secured.

If necessary, store the vehicle tool in the container, inside the luggage compartment.

Replace the carpet on the luggage compartment floor.

Lower the rear shelf.

Close the rear lid.

If the spare wheel is different to the rest of the vehicle tyres

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the vehicle - for example with winter tyres or the temporary spare wheel - you should only use the spare tyre for a short period of time and drive with extra care .

Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.

Please observe driving advice:

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

218 Vehicle care and maintenance

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

Snow chains on the temporary spare wheel are not permitted page 220.

After mounting the spare wheel or the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressure as soon as possible page 214.

It is advisable to check the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel tyre pres- sure when checking the rest of the vehicle wheels at least once a month. The spare wheel should have the highest pressure allowed for the vehicle page 214. The sticker situated on the temporary spare wheel shows the tyre pressure.

WARNING

Incorrect handling of the spare wheel or the temporary spare wheel can cause loss of vehicle control, producing collisions or other serious acci- dents and injury.

Never use the spare wheel or the temporary spare wheel if it is dam- aged or worn to the wear indicator.

In some vehicles the spare wheel is smaller than the original tyres. This can be seen on a sticker showing the text 80 km/h and 50 mph. This text indicates the maximum velocity permitted for this type of tyre.

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid powerful accelera- tion, hard braking and taking corners at high speed.

Never drive more than 200 km (120 miles) with a temporary spare wheel fitted to the drive axle.

Replace the temporary spare wheel for a normal wheel as soon as possible. The compact temporary spare wheel is only intended for tempo- rary use over short distances.

The temporary spare wheel must always be secured with the factory supplied wheel bolts.

WARNING (Continued)

You should never use more than one temporary spare wheel.

After mounting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressure as soon as possible page 214.

Snow chains on the temporary spare wheel are not permitted.

Note Wherever possible, secure the spare wheel, temporary spare wheel or the replaced wheel safely in the luggage compartment. In vehicles with anti- puncture kit, it is not possible to secure the defective wheel.

Tyre code

Fig. 127 Universal code on tyres

219Vehicle care and maintenance

Radial

Rim diameter code

Load index & speed rating

DOT tyre identification number

Severe snow conditions

Tyre ply composition and materials used

Max. load rating

Treadwear, traction and temperature grades

Max. permissible inflation pressure

Passenger car tyre

Nominal width of tyre in millimetres

Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

Tyre code (example) Meaning

Make, logotype Manufacturer

Product name Name of tyre assigned by manufacturer.

P255 / 55 R 18 Size:

P Passenger vehicle code.

255 Nominal width between walls, in mm.

55 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre type (R indicates "radial").

18 Rim diameter in inches

109 H Load index page 220 and speed rating page 220.

XL Reinforced tyres.

M+S or M/S or Winter tyres code (mud and snow tyres).

RADIAL TUBELESS Radial tyre without inner tube.

E4 ... E-mark certifying tyre complies with internation- al legislation followed by a number denoting the country granting the authorisation. The authori- sation number ( several digits) is shown below.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Tyre code (example) Meaning

DOT BT RA TY5 1709 Tyre identification number (TINa), may be only on interior wall of wheel) and date of manufacture:

DOT The tyre complies with the legal require- ments of the US Department of Trans- port, responsible for tyre safety regula- tions.

BT Place of manufacture code.

RA Information about manufacturer and tyre size.

TY5 Manufacturer's tyre specifications.

1709 Date of manufacture: Week 17 of 2009.

TWI This identifies the position of the Tread Wear In- dicator page 215.

Made in Germany Country of manufacture.

MAX LOAD 615 KG US load rating, indicating maximum permitted load per tyre.

MAX INFLATION 350 KPA (51 PSI)

US limit, indicating maximum permitted tyre pressure.

SIDEWALL 1 PLY RAYON Information about tyre wall components: 1 layer of rayon (artificial silk).

TREAD 4 PLIES 1 RAYON + 2 STEEL + 1 NYLON

Information about tread components: In the example, there are 4 layers below the tread: 1 layer of rayon (artificial silk), 2 layers of steel reinforcement and 1 layer of nylon.

Information for the end consumer concerning the comparative values of the established base tyres (standardised test procedures) page 233:

TREADWEAR 220 Relative service life of the tyre, with respect to specific US standard test.

TRACTION A Braking capacity of tyre on wet surface (AA, A, B or C).

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

220 Vehicle care and maintenance

Tyre code (example) Meaning

TEMPERATURE A Tyre temperature resistance at higher test speeds (A, B or C).

If the tyre has other markings, these are specific tyre manufacturer codes or specific national codes, e.g. for Brazil or China.

a) The letters TIN refer to the tyre serial number.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction of rotation, drive with ex- treme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is of partic- ular importance when the road surface is wet. Change the tyre as soon as possible or remount it with the correct direction of rotation.

Tyre load rating

The load rating code indicates the maximum load in kilogrammes each wheel can carry (load capacity).

425 Kg

462 Kg

487 Kg

515 Kg

545 Kg

615 Kg

Speed rating

The speed rating indicates the maximum speed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

78

81

83

85

87

91

P

Q

max. 170 km/h (106 mph)

max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

max. 200 km/h (124 mph)

max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 270 km/h (168 mph)

max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters ZR for tyres with a maximum author- ised speed above 240 km/h (149 miles).

Snow chains

When using snow chains, applicable local legislation and maximum permit- ted speed limits must be observed.

In winter weather, snow chains not only help to improve grip but also im- prove the braking capacity.

The fitting of chains is permitted only on front wheels and only with the fol- lowing combinations of wheel trims and tyres:

Tyre size Wheel rim

165/70 R14 5 J x 14 offset of 35

175/65 R14

SEAT recommends you ask a Technical Service for further information on wheel, tyre and chain sizes.

Wherever possible use fine-link chains measuring less than 15 mm includ- ing the lock.

R

S

T

U

H

V

Z

W

Y

221Vehicle care and maintenance

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains . The wheel bolts should be covered with caps for safety reasons. These are available from Technical Services.

Temporary spare wheel

For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tem- porary spare wheel page 217.

If it is necessary to fit chains with the temporary spare wheel in use, install the temporary spare wheel on the rear axle in the event of a fault in a front wheel. Then, fit the rear wheel that is free, instead of the damaged front wheel. In this situation, observe the rotating direction of the wheels. SEAT recommends attaching the snow chains before fitting the wheel.

WARNING

The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted chains could lead to serious ac- cidents and damage.

Always the appropriate snow chains.

Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufac- turer.

Never exceed the maximum permitted speeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.

Wheel rims may be damaged or scratched if the chains come into direct contact with them. SEAT recommends the use of covered snow chains.

Note Snow chains are available in different sizes according to the vehicle type.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

222 Vehicle care and maintenance

Accessories, replacements, repairs and modifications

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Seat belts page 56

Airbag system page 65

Roof carrier page 104

Ashtray and cigarette lighter page 115

Power socket page 117

Braking, stopping and parking page 134

Parking sensor system page 149

Cruise control system (CCS) page 152

Working in the engine compartment page 180

Engine oil page 185

Engine coolant page 189

Vehicle battery page 193

Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior page 197

Care and cleaning of the vehicle interior page 205

Notes for the user page 233

Booklet Radio

Instruction Manual for the Portable Navigation System (supplied by SEAT) in the equipment.

WARNING

The use of spare parts and accessories, or incorrectly performed modifi- cations or repairs may result in damage to the vehicle, accidents and se- rious injury.

SEAT strongly recommends you to only use SEAT approved accesso- ries and SEAT original spare parts. These parts and accessories have been specially tested by SEAT for suitability, reliability and safety.

Have any repairs or modifications carried out at a specialised work- shop. Specialised workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostics equipment, repair information and qualified personnel.

Only mount parts with the same specifications as the parts fitted at factory.

Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as drink holders or telephone cradles over the covers of the airbag modules or within their deployment zones.

Only use wheels and tyre combinations which have been approved by SEAT for your vehicle type.

223Vehicle care and maintenance

Running-in

Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.

Running-in the engine

The engine needs to be run in over the first 1500 km (1000 miles). During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future engine performance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate speed, especially when the engine is cold, as this will reduce engine wear and increase its useful life. Never drive at extremely low engine speeds. Change down to a lower gear when the engine no longer runs smoothly. Up to 1000 kilometres the following instructions apply:

Do not use full throttle.

Do not force the engine above two thirds of its maximum speed.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to 1000 miles), gradually in- crease power until reaching the maximum speed and high engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads

Replacement of new tyres and wheel rims page 210

Notes on the brakes page 134

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and the engine oil consumption reduced.

Accessories and spare parts

SEAT recommends you consult an Official Service before purchasing acces- sories and spare parts or consumables. For example, when fitting accesso-

ries at a later date, or when replacing a component. A SEAT Official Service will advise you as to the legal requirements and manufacturer's recommen- dations regarding accessories, spare parts and other components.

SEAT recommend you use only approved SEAT accessories and genuine SEAT spare parts. These parts and accessories have been specially tested by SEAT for suitability, reliability and safety. In addition the SEAT Technical Service will guarantee that the assembly is carried out professionally.

Although we continually monitor the market, SEAT cannot guarantee that products not approved by SEAT are reliable, safe and suitable for the vehi- cle. Therefore, SEAT cannot accept liability, even in those cases authorised by an officially recognised technical inspection office or other official body.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct effect on vehicle control must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the Euro- pean Union's authorisation symbol). This includes cruise control systems or electronically controlled suspension.

If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to con- trol the vehicle itself, these must bear the mark (European Union manu- facturer conformity declaration). This includes refrigerator boxes, laptops or ventilator fans.

WARNING

Unprofessional repairs or modifications to the vehicle may affect the per- formance of the airbags, resulting in operating faults or fatal accident.

Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as drink holders or telephone cradles over or next to the covers of the airbag modules or within their deployment zones.

Objects placed over the airbag covers, or within their deployment zones, could lead to serious injury or loss of life if the airbags are trig- gered.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

224 Vehicle care and maintenance

Fluids and consumables

All vehicle fluids and consumables, such as notched belts, tyres, coolant fluids, engine oils, spark plugs and batteries are continually being devel- oped. Therefore all fluids and consumables should be changed at a special- ised workshop. Technical Services are permanently informed of any modifi- cations.

WARNING

The incorrect use or handling of fluids or consumables may result in acci- dent, serious injury, burns or intoxication.

Therefore, fluids must always be stored closed in their original con- tainer.

Never store fluids in empty food containers or bottles as other people may accidentally drink the fluid.

Keep all fluids and consumables out of reach of children.

Read and observe the information and warnings given on the fluid containers.

Only work in the open air or in well-ventilated zones, when using products which give off harmful vapours.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, acetone or any other volatile liquid in the maintenance of the vehicle. These are toxic and highly flam- mable. They could lead to fire or explosions!

CAUTION Only use appropriate fluids. Never mix the fluids. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!

Accessories and other components mounted in front of the air inlet re- duce the cooling effect of the coolant. If the engine is running under great strain in high outside temperatures, it could overheat.

For the sake of the environment Leaking fluids could pollute the environment. Collect any spilt fluids in suit- able containers and dispose of in accordance with legislation and with re- spect for the environment.

Repairs and technical changes

When performing repairs and technical modifications, SEAT's directives must be observed!

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the faults. This may significantly affect the vehicle's performance, increase component wear and could mean that the vehicle registration documents are no longer valid.

Your SEAT Official Service cannot be held liable for any damage caused by technical modifications or repairs performed incorrectly.

The SEAT Official Service does not accept liability for damage resulting from technical modifications or repairs performed incorrectly; neither is the SEAT warranty valid in these cases.

SEAT recommends you have any technical modifications or repairs per- formed at a SEAT Official Service and that you use genuine SEAT spare parts.

Vehicles with special accessories and equipment

The manufacturers of additional equipment guarantee that the equipment complies with applicable laws and regulations with respect to the environ- ment, in particular Directives 2000/53/CE and 2003/11/CE. The first direc- tive governs the disposal of end-of-life vehicles while the second refers to the restrictions on the marketing and use of certain dangerous substances and preparations.

225Vehicle care and maintenance

The vehicle owner should keep the documentation for the additional equip- ment safely and hand it over to the scrap yard at the end of the vehicle's service life. This ensures that any additional equipment mounted in end-of- life vehicles is correctly disposed of with respect for the environment.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not performed correctly may result in damage or errors in the vehicle operation, affecting the effectiveness of the driver assist systems. This could result in serious accident.

All repairs and modifications to the vehicle should only be performed by a specialised workshop.

Repair and faults in the airbag system

When performing repairs and technical modifications, SEAT's directives must be observed!

Modifications and repairs to the front bumper, doors, front seats, and re- pairs to the roof or chassis should only be carried out in a specialised work- shop. These components may contain parts or sensors belonging to the air- bag system.

If work is carried out on the airbag system or parts have to be removed and fitted on the system when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all.

So that the effectiveness of the airbag is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regulations must be observed. These requirements are known to specialised workshops.

Modifications to the vehicle suspension may affect the operation of the air- bag system in the event of collision. For example, if wheel and tyre combi- nations not approved by SEAT are used, or if the vehicle height is lowered,

the suspension is stiffened or the suspension springs, telescopic arms, dampers, etc., are modified, the results received by the airbag sensors and sent to the control unit may not be accurate. For example, some modifica- tions to the suspension could increase the force measured by the sensors and result in the triggering of the airbag systems in collisions. Under normal conditions, the measured values would be lower and the airbag would not have been triggered. Other modifications may reduce the forces measured by the sensors and therefore the airbags are not triggered in situations when they should have triggered.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not performed correctly may result in damage or errors in the vehicle operation, affecting the effectiveness of the airbag systems. This could result in serious or fatal accident.

All repairs and modifications to the vehicle should only be performed by a specialised workshop.

Airbag modules must never be repaired: if damaged, they must be re- placed.

Never fit recycled or reused airbag components in your vehicle.

WARNING

Modifications to the vehicle suspension, including the use of unauthor- ised wheel and tyre combinations, may affect the performance of the air- bags and increase the risk of serious or fatal injury in the event of acci- dent.

Never fit suspension components which are not identical to the origi- nal parts mounted in the vehicle.

Never use wheel and tyre combinations not approved by SEAT.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

226 Vehicle care and maintenance

Retro-fitting of two-way radios

An exterior aerial is required for the use of two-way radios in the vehicle.

The retro-fitting of electrical or electronic appliances in the vehicle is sub- ject to their approval for use in your vehicle. Under certain circumstances, this could mean that your vehicle registration documents are no longer val- id.

SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with two-way radios providing the following conditions are observed:

The exterior aerial must be mounted professionally.

The maximum transmitting power is 10 watts.

The optimal reach of the equipment is only achieved with an external aerial.

Check first with a specialised workshop if you wish to use a two-way radio with a transmitting power of over 10 watts. The specialised workshops are familiar with the technical options for installation. SEAT recommends visit- ing a Technical Service.

All legal requirements, together with the instructions for the use of two-way radios must be observed.

WARNING

If the two-way radio is not securely fastened in position, it could be sent flying around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, sudden manoeu- vres or accident, causing injury.

While driving, two-way radios must be securely fastened in position, outside the airbags deployment zones, or safely stowed away.

WARNING

When using a two-way radio without a connection to an exterior aerial, the maximum permitted levels of electromagnetic radiation may be ex- ceeded. This is also the case if the aerial has not been correctly installed.

You should only use a two-way radio inside the vehicle if it has first been correctly connected to an exterior aerial.

Information stored by the control units

Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a series of electronic control units responsible for the engine and gearbox management. In addition, the con- trol units supervise the performance of the exhaust gas system and the air- bag systems.

Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven, these electronic control units are continuously analysing the vehicle data. In the event of faults or devia- tions from the theoretical values, only this data is stored. Normally, the warning lamps on the instrument panel light up in the event of faults.

This data can only be read and analysed using special equipment.

The storing of the data allows specialised workshops to detect and repair faults. Stored data may include:

Data relating to the engine or the gearbox

Speed

Direction of travel

Braking force

Detection of seat belt

The vehicle control units never record conversations held by passengers in the vehicle.

227Vehicle care and maintenance

In vehicles equipped with an emergency call function via the mobile phone or other appliances connected in the vehicle, it is possible to send the vehi- cle position. If the control unit records an accident with airbag activation, the system may automatically send a signal. This will depend on the net- work operator. Normally, transmission is only possible in areas with good coverage.

Event Data Recorder

The vehicle is not fitted with an event data recorder.

An event data recorder temporarily stores the vehicle information. There- fore, in the event of accident, it is possible to obtain detailed information about how the accident occurred. For example, in vehicles with airbag sys- tems, data relating to speed of impact, seat belt status, seat positions and airbag activation times may be stored. The volume of data depends on the manufacturer.

Event data recorders can only be mounted with authorisation from the vehi- cle owner and, in some countries, they are governed by local legislation.

Reprogramming control units

On the whole, all the data required for the component management is stor- ed in the control units. The programming of certain convenience functions, such as the convenience turn signals, individual door opening and instruc- tions on the display can be modified using special equipment at the work- shop. If the comfort functions are reprogrammed, the information and In- struction Manual descriptions will not coincide with the modified functions. Therefore, SEAT recommends that any modifications are recorded in the sec- tion Other workshop notes in the Maintenance Programme.

The SEAT Official Service must have a record of any modification to the pro- gramming.

Reading the vehicle fault memory

There is a diagnostics connector in the vehicle interior for reading the vehi- cle fault memory. The fault memory documents errors and deviations from the theoretical values of the electronic control units.

The diagnostics connector is in the driver side footwell area, next to the lev- er for opening the bonnet, below a cover.

The fault memory should only be read and reset by a specialised workshop.

Using a mobile telephone in a vehicle without connection to an exterior aerial

Mobile telephones transmit and receive radio waves also called high-fre- quency energy, both when in use and when on stand-by. Scientific studies state that radio waves exceeding certain values may be harmful to the hu- man body. International committees and authorities have established limits and directives in order to ensure electromagnetic radiation from mobile phones remains within certain limits that do not endanger human health. Nevertheless, there is no conclusive scientific evidence that wireless tele- phones are totally safe.

That is why some experts recommend moderate use of the mobile tele- phone, and the appliance of measures to reduce radiation on the human body.

When a mobile phone not connected to an exterior aerial is used inside the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation may be greater than if the mobile phone were connected to a built-in aerial or to another exterior aerial.

If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands-free device that allows the em- ployment of numerous additional mobile telephone functions with compati- ble Bluetooth technology, it will comply with the legislation in many coun- tries which only permits the use of mobile phones inside vehicles using a hands-free device.

The hands-free system of the Portable Navigation System (supplied by SEAT) has been designed for use with conventional mobile phones and phones with Bluetooth technology page 229. Mobile telephones must be placed in a suitable telephone support or stored safely in the vehicle. If a support is used for the telephone, it must be securely fastened to the base

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

228 Vehicle care and maintenance

plate. The mobile will be secure on the instrument panel and always within reach of the driver only by following these procedures. Mobile telephone connection with an external aerial is carried out subject to the hands-free device, via the telephone support or by the Bluetooth connections present in the mobile telephone and the vehicle.

If the mobile phone is connected to an aerial incorporated into the vehicle or an exterior aerial connected to the vehicle, this will help to reduce the electromagnetic radiation transmitted and the risk to human health. It will also improve the quality of the connection.

If the phone is used inside the vehicle without the hands-free system, it will not be securely fastened and will not be connected to the exterior aerial of the vehicle telephone. Nor will the telephone charge if it is not on the sup- port. In addition, some calls may break off and the quality of the connection will be affected.

Mobile telephones should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con- nected to a hands-free system. SEAT recommends using an external aerial should you wish to use a mobile telephone inside the vehicle.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

WARNING

If the mobile phone is not securely fastened in position, it could be sent flying around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, sudden manoeu- vres or accident, causing injury.

While driving, the mobile telephone, other equipment including tele- phone accessories such as telephone supports, notepads and navigators must be correctly secured, away from the airbags deployment zones, or stored in a safe place.

WARNING

When using a mobile telephone or two-way radio without connecting an external aerial, the maximum permitted levels of electromagnetic radia- tion in the vehicle may be exceeded, thus putting the driver and the rest of the vehicle occupants in danger. This is also the case if the aerial has not been correctly installed.

A minimum of 20 centimetres should be kept between mobile phone aerials and artificial pacemakers, as mobile telephones may affect the working of pacemakers.

Do not keep mobile phones in breast pockets directly above pacemak- ers.

Immediately switch off the mobile telephone if you suspect any inter- ference with pacemakers or other types of medical equipment.

229Vehicle care and maintenance

SEAT Portable System*

Fig. 128 In the centre console: Remove the nav- igator

Fig. 129 Remove the navigator holder

The SEAT Portable System (supplied by SEAT) allows for the use of other ve- hicle functions such as additional applications .

The gradient and the angle of vision can be set by moving the navigator to the required position Fig. 128 .

The Portable Navigation System Instruction Manual can be observed direct- ly on the equipment.

Functions1)

Multifunction display (MFI) shown with additional instruments page 17.

Operation of a factory-fitted radio and a Booklet Radio system connec- ted multimedia player.

Image display.

Navigation.

Hands-free system for mobile telephones via Bluetooth.

Door open.

Optical parking system (OPS).

Recommended gear and driving advice.

Observe the Instruction Manual in the equipment

Connect the Portable Navigation System.

Press the button more on the screen.

Press the Manual button.

Select the required chapter and press the corresponding button.

Removing and fitting the navigator

Securely support the navigator.

Press the release button 1 until the device is released from its holder.

Take the navigator out and store it safely.

To fit the navigator, place it in the upper support and push the lower part inside the holder until it engages with a click .

1) subject to the vehicle

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

230 Vehicle care and maintenance

Removing and fitting the navigator holder

Press the holder release button Fig. 129 (arrow).

Remove the holder from the dash panel in an upwards direction.

If necessary, close the opening with the corresponding cover.

In order to fit the holder, place it on the opening from above and press in a downwards direction until it engages with a click. .

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the navigator could distract you from the traffic.

Always stay alert and drive responsibly.

Select volume settings that allow you to easily hear signals from out- side the vehicle at all times (e.g. emergency service sirens).

Setting the volume too high may cause damage to your hearing. This also applies if the device is set to high volumes for a short period.

WARNING

Journey instructions and traffic signals shown on the navigation system may differ to the current traffic situation.

Traffic signals and driving regulations take precedence over journey instructions and indications from the navigation system.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

WARNING

If the navigator is not securely fastened in position, it could be sent fly- ing around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, sudden manoeuvres or accident, causing injury.

Fit the navigator housing safely on the corresponding opening on the dash panel.

Always place the navigator securely in its holder or store it safely in the vehicle.

CAUTION An unsuitable gradient and angle of vision setting can damage the naviga- tor.

When adjusting the navigation device, move it with care and not beyond its limits.

CAUTION Excessively high or low outside temperatures can affect the Portable Navi- gation System operation or damage the device.

Always take the Portable Navigation System with you when you leave the vehicle to protect it from excessively high or low temperatures and intense sunlight.

CAUTION Humidity can damage the Portable Navigation System connections on the dash panel.

Do not clean the holder for the navigation device with moist products. Use a dry cloth.

Note SEAT recommends taking the Portable Navigation System with you when you leave the vehicle to prevent it from being stolen.

231Vehicle care and maintenance

Jacking points for raising vehicle

Fig. 130 Front jacking points for raising vehicle with lifting platform or jack

Fig. 131 Rear jacking points for raising vehicle with lifting platform or jack

Always use the jacking points indicated in the figures Fig. 130 and Fig. 131 when raising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at these points, it could be seriously damaged or lead to serious injury .

The vehicle should not be lifted using lifting platforms with lift pads con- taining fluid.

When raising a vehicle using a platform or jack, a series of precautionary measures are required. Never raise the vehicle with a lifting platform or jack unless you have received training in how to do so and know how to lift the vehicle safely.

Notes on raising the vehicle with a jack page 252.

WARNING

The improper use of the lifting platform or the jack when raising the vehi- cle may result in accidents or serious injury.

Before raising the vehicle, please observe the manufacturer's instruc- tions for the platform or jack, and the legal requirements, where applica- ble.

There should not be anyone inside the vehicle when it is being raised or once it is in the air.

Only use the jacking points indicated in the figures Fig. 130 and Fig. 131 when raising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at the indi- cated points, it may fall from the platform while the engine or gearbox is being dismounted, for example.

The jacking points should be centrally aligned and firmly positioned on the platform support plates.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised! The vehicle may fall from the platform due to the engine vibrations.

If it is necessary to work underneath the vehicle while it is raised, you should check that the supporting stands have an adequate load capacity.

Never climb onto the lifting platform.

Always make sure that the weight of the vehicle does not exceed the lifting platform load capacity.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

232 Vehicle care and maintenance

CAUTION Never raise the vehicle at the engine oil sump, the gearbox or the rear or front axles.

Always use an intermediate rubber support to prevent damage to the vehicle underbody. Check that the arms of the lifting platform are able to move with obstruction.

The arms should not come into contact with the side running boards or other parts of the vehicle.

233Vehicle care and maintenance

Notes for the user

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Accessories, parts replacement, repairs and modifications page 222

Booklet Maintenance Programme

WARNING

Failure to treat the vehicle with the correct care increases the risk of acci- dent and injury.

Observe legal requirements.

Observe the Instruction Manual.

CAUTION If you do not treat the vehicle suitably, you may cause it to be damaged.

Observe legal requirements.

Carry out regular maintenance of the vehicle, according to specifications in the Maintenance Programme.

Observe the Instruction Manual.

Labels and plates

Fig. 132 Warnings relat- ing to handling of the City Safety Assist system laser sensor function

Some parts in the engine compartment come from the factory with certifi- cates of safety, labels or plates containing important information regarding the operation of the vehicle, for example, on the petrol cap, on the passeng- er's sun visor, on the driver door strut, or on the floor of the luggage com- partment.

Never remove these certificates of safety, labels or plates, and ensure they are kept in good condition and are legible.

If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate of safety, label or plate, is re- placed, the specialised workshop should attach the information back in the same place.

Certificate of safety

A certificate of safety on the door strut states that all the safety standards and regulations established by the national traffic authorities responsible for road safety were met at the time of manufacture. It may also give the month and year of manufacture, together with the chassis number.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

234 Vehicle care and maintenance

Warning of high voltage label

There is a label close to the bonnet lock which warns of high voltage in the vehicle electrical installation.

Warning relating to the City Safety Assist system laser sensor

There are some warning and information signs on the City Safety Assist sys- tem laser sensor Fig. 132.

Using your vehicle in other countries and continents

The vehicle is manufactured at the factory for use in a particular country in accordance with the national legislation in force at the time of manufacture.

If the vehicle is sold in another country or used in another country for an ex- tended period of time, the applicable legislation of that country should be observed.

It may be necessary to fit or remove certain pieces of equipment or to deac- tivate certain functions. Service work may also be affected. This is particu- larly true if the vehicle is used in a different climate for an extended period of time.

As there are different types of frequency bands around the world, you may find that the radio system or the Portable Navigation System (supplied by SEAT) supplied at the factory does not work in another country.

CAUTION SEAT does not accept liability for any damage to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

SEAT does not accept liability if the vehicle does not comply in part or in full with the legal requirements of other countries or continents.

Radio reception and the aerial

For factory-fitted radio equipment, the aerial for radio reception is fitted to the roof of the vehicle.

Note If electrical equipment such as mobile telephones, is used near a roof aer- ial, you may observe interference in the reception of AM stations.

Notes on SEAT repairs

Information about authorised SEAT services and authorised SEAT repairs can be requested by payment at the following addresses:

Clients in Europe, Asia, Australia, Africa, Central America and South America

Contact a Technical Service or specialised workshop, or request the corre- sponding documentation at www.erwin.volkswagen.de.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not performed correctly may result in damage or errors in the vehicle operation, affecting the effectiveness of the driver assist and airbag systems. This could result in serious acci- dent.

Have any repairs or modifications carried out at a specialised work- shop.

235Vehicle care and maintenance

Conformity certification

The respective manufacturer hereby declares that the products indicated as follows fulfil the basic requirements and the following dispositions and im- portant legislations on the date of manufacture of the vehicle, among oth- ers FCC Part 15.19, FCC Part 15.21 and RSS-Gen Issue 1:

Radio frequency equipment

Electronic gearbox lock.

Vehicle key

Electrical equipment

12 volt power socket

Environmental friendliness

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufacture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recycling

Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling

Modular construction to facilitate dismantling

Increased use of single-grade materials.

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.

Choice of materials

Use of recycled materials.

Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated.

Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources.

Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials.

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities.

Use of plastic film as protection during vehicle transport.

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling systems.

Recycling and energy recovery from residues (RDF).

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, en- thalpy wheels, etc.).

The use of water-soluble paints

Collection and scrapping of end-of-life vehicles

Collection of end-of-life vehicles

SEAT is already prepared for the moment when you wish to scrap your vehi- cle and offers you an environmentally-friendly solution. An extensive net- work of used car reception centres already exists in much of Europe. After the vehicle has been delivered, you will receive a certificate of destruction describing the environmentally friendly scrapping of the vehicle in accord- ance with applicable legislation.

We will collect the used vehicle free of charge, provided it complies with all national legislation.

Please see your Technical Service for further information about the collec- tion and scrapping of end-of-life vehicles.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

236 Vehicle care and maintenance

Scrapping

The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the airbag or belt tensioner systems are scrapped. These re- quirements are known to specialised workshops.

237Vehicle care and maintenance

Engine management and exhaust gas purification system

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Changing gear page 124

Refuelling page 171

Fuel page 177

Engine oil page 185

Vehicle battery page 193

Information stored in the control units page 222

Tow starting and towing away page 278

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a fire.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as dried grass).

Never apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the ex- haust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys- tem.

Control lamps

lights up

Possible cause Solution

Fault in engine management (Electronic Power Control).

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

Fault in catalytic converter.

You should reduce speed accord- ingly. Drive carefully until you reach the next specialised work- shop. Have the engine checked there.

flashes Possible cause Solution

Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic convert- er.

You should reduce speed accord- ingly. Drive carefully until you reach the next specialised work- shop. Have the engine checked there.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding de- scriptions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Note While the control lamps or maintain lit up, the engine will present faults, a higher consumption of fuel and a loss of engine power.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

238 Vehicle care and maintenance

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter permits the subsequent treatment of the exhaust gases thus reducing contaminating gas emissions. To ensure a longer work- ing life for the exhaust system and catalytic converter in a petrol engine:

Always use unleaded petrol.

Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

Do not top up with too much engine oil page 185.

Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter cables page 275.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the car is moving, reduce speed immediately. Have the car inspected by a special- ised workshop. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be dam- aged by overheating.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used.

239Practical information

If and when

Practical information

Frequently asked questions

If you suspect that the vehicle has a fault or is damaged when using it, be- fore consulting a SEAT dealership or a specialised workshop, carefully read the following instructions. Similarly, the terms in the alphabetical index Things to note or Checklist may be of help.

Problem Possible causes, among others

Possible solution

The engine does not start.

The vehicle battery is flat.

Carry out the jump start page 275. Charge the battery page 193.

You are using an incor- rect vehicle key.

Use the correct key page 28.

The fuel tank level is insufficient.

Refuel page 171.

The vehicle cannot be locked or un- locked with the key.

Vehicle key battery is flat. Too far away from the vehicle. Buttons pressed out- side the radius of reach.

Change the battery page 28. Move closer to the vehicle. Synchronize the vehicle key page 28. Manually lock or unlock the vehicle page 244.

Unusual noises.

Engine cold, City Safe- ty Assist system, steer- ing column electronic lock.

See entry Noises in the de- tailed alphabetical index.

Problem Possible causes, among others

Possible solution

Handling is strange.

Assistance systems ac- tive.

See entry Assistance sys- tems in the detailed alpha- betical index.

You are using an incor- rect tyre pressure.

Check the tyre pressure page 210.

Damage to the wheel trims or tyres.

Inspect wheel trims and tyres regularly for damage page 210 and replace them if necessary page 252.

Vehicle has no jack, spare wheel or tire mobility set present.

Equipment subject to the vehicle.

No direct solution, depends on the equipment. In this case, you should contact a SEAT Dealership page 247.

Surface not correct- ly illuminated.

Headlights covered for driving on the left- hand side or right- hand side. Headlight adjust- ment too high. Faulty bulbs. Dipped headlights switched off.

Cover the headlights for driving on the left-hand side or right-hand side page 82. Adjust the headlight range page 82. Change the bulbs page 266. Switch on the dipped headlights page 82.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

240 Practical information

Problem Possible causes, among others

Possible solution

The electrical equipment is not working.

Vehicle battery flat. Charge the battery page 193.

Fuel tank level insuffi- cient.

Refuel page 171.

A fuse is blown. Check fuse and change if necessary page 263.

Fuel consumption higher than nor- mal.

Short trips. Irregularities in the accelerator pedal.

Avoid short trips. Foresight when driving. Press the accelerator even- ly.

Electrical equipment connected.

Switch off any unnecessary electrical equipment.

Fault in engine man- agement.

Have the fault rectified page 237.

Tyre pressure too low. Adjust tyre pressure page 210.

Driving on hills. No direct solution.

Driving with a heavy load.

No direct solution.

Driving at an excessive engine speed.

Shift up a gear.

241Practical information

In case of emergency

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Braking, stopping and parking page 134

Emergency locking and unlocking page 244

Vehicle tools page 247

Change wheel page 252

WARNING

A faulty vehicle in traffic represents a risk of accident for the driver and for other road users.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Park the vehicle a safe distance from surrounding traffic to lock all the doors in case of an emer- gency. Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be locked. In case of an emergency, passengers will be trap- ped inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures.

Protecting yourself and securing the vehicle

Fig. 133 Dash panel: Button to switch on and off the hazard warning lights system

Always fulfil legal requirements for securing a broken down vehicle. In a number of countries it is now obligatory, for example, to turn on the hazard warning lights and use a reflective safety vest page 243.

Checklist

For your own safety and that of other passengers, the following points should be observed in the order given :

1. Park the vehicle a safe distance from traffic and on suitable ground .

2. Turn on the hazard warning lights with the button Fig. 133.

3. Apply the handbrake firmly page 134.

4. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector lever in position P page 124.

5. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.

6. Have all occupants leave the vehicle and move to safety, for example behind a guard rail.

7. When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with you.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

242 Practical information

Checklist (Continued)

8. Place an emergency warning triangle to indicate the position of your vehicle to other road users.

9. Allow the engine to cool and check if a specialist is required.

When being towed with the hazard warning lights on, a change in direction or traffic lane can be indicated as usual using the turn signal lever. The haz- ard lights will be interrupted temporarily.

Examples of when to use the hazard warning lights:

If the vehicles ahead suddenly slow down or reach the end of a traffic jam, to warn the vehicles behind.

In case of an emergency.

If the vehicle breaks down.

When tow-starting or towing.

Always comply with the applicable laws regarding the use of hazard warn- ing lights.

If the hazard warning lights are not working, you must use an alternative method of drawing attention to your vehicle. This method must comply with traffic legislation.

WARNING

Failure to follow the checklist prepared for your own safety could lead to accidents and severe injuries.

Always complete the operations given in the checklist and observe the general rules of safety.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a fire and considerable damage.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as dried grass or fuel).

Note The vehicle battery will discharge and run down if the hazard warning lights remain on for too much time (even with the ignition turned off).

Note For some vehicles, the brake lights will blink when braking suddenly at speeds of approximately 80 km/h (50 mph) to warn vehicles behind. If brak- ing continues, then the hazard warning lights system will automatically be turned on at the speed of less than approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). The brake lights remain lit. Upon accelerating, the hazard warning lights will be automatically turned off.

243Practical information

First aid kit, warning triangle and fire extinguishers*

Fig. 134 In the luggage compartment: storage compartment for the warning triangle

Warning triangle

In some vehicle equipment it is possible to store the warning triangle model shown in a storage compartment of the luggage compartment Fig. 134.

First-aid kit

The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements. Check the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisher

A fire extinguisher can be stored in a holder in the passenger seat footwell.

The fire extinguisher must conform to legal requirements, be ready for use and be checked regularly. Check the certification seal on the extinguisher.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and especially in accidents causing seri- ous injury.

Secure or store fire extinguishers, first aid kit, reflective vests and warning triangle securely in the vehicle.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

244 Practical information

Emergency locking and unlocking

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked manually and partially opened, for ex- ample if the key or the central locking is damaged.

Additional information and warnings:

Vehicle key set page 28

Central locking and locking system page 32

Doors page 37

Rear lid page 39

In case of emergency page 241

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury.

If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get them- selves to safety.

Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in seri- ous injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the rear lid is dangerous and can lead to serious injury.

Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTION When opening and closing in an emergency, carefully disassemble compo- nents and then reassemble them carefully to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Manually locking and unlocking the driver door

Fig. 135 Driver side door handle with lock cylinder

As a general rule, when the driver door is locked all other doors are locked. Unlocking manually only opens the driver door.

Unfold the key shaft if necessary page 28.

Insert the key shaft into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle Fig. 135.

245Practical information

Manually locking the passenger side door

Fig. 136 To the front of the passenger side door: Emergency lock, hidden by a rubber cap

Fig. 137 Emergency locking of the vehicle us- ing the vehicle key

The passenger door can be manually locked.

Door open.

Remove the rubber cap to the front of the door. The rubber cap is marked with a lock symbol Fig. 136.

Unfold the key shaft if necessary page 28.

Insert the key shaft horizontally into the opening and moved the colour lever forwards Fig. 137.

Replace the rubber cap and close the door.

Check if the door is locked.

Have the vehicle checked by a specialised workshop.

Note The doors can be opened and unlocked individually from the inside by pull- ing the inside door handle. If necessary, pull the inner door release lever twice page 32.

Emergency unlocking the rear lid

Fig. 138 From the lug- gage compartment: Man- ually unlocking the rear lid

If necessary, fold the rear seat bench backrest forwards page 54.

Remove equipment to access the inside of the rear lid.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

246 Practical information

Unfold the key shaft page 28.

Insert the key shaft into the rear lid opening Fig. 138 and press the release lever in the direction of the arrow to unlock the rear lid.

247Practical information

Vehicle tool kit*

Introduction

When securing the vehicle in case of a breakdown, please note the legal re- quirements for each country.

Vehicle tool kit

For vehicles with a factory-fitted spare wheel or temporary spare wheel, in addition to winter wheels, the luggage compartment may contain additional vehicle tools page 247.

Additional information and warnings:

Working in the engine compartment page 180

In case of emergency page 241

Change wheel page 252

Tire Mobility Set page 258

WARNING

When the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility set and spare wheel are loose in the interior they can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and especially in accidents causing serious injury.

Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tire mobility set and the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel are safely secured in the luggage com- partment.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can cause injury or accidents.

Never work with inappropriate or damaged tools.

Location

Fig. 139 In the luggage compartment: The carpet is raised

The vehicle tool kit, spare wheel, temporary spare wheel and the tire mobili- ty set are stored in the luggage compartment under the carpeted floor panel Fig. 139.

If necessary, remove the luggage compartment variable floor page 98.

Raise the carpet at the recess (arrow) Fig. 139.

Note After use, return the jack to its initial position using the handle in order to securely store it in the vehicle.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

248 Practical information

Access the tools and anti-puncture kit in vehicles equipped with SEAT SOUND 7 speakers (with subwoofer)*

Open the rear lid and lift the shelf.

If necessary, remove the luggage compartment variable floor page 101.

Lift up the carpet from the recess and remove it from the luggage com- partment.

Disconnect the subwoofers speaker cable.

Remove the whole hand wheel located in the centre of the subwoofer by rotating it anti-clockwise.

Remove the subwoofer, under which the tools and anti-puncture kit are stowed.

After you have used them, put the the tools and anti-puncture kit back exactly as you found them so that the speaker will sit properly in its hous- ing.

Fit the subwoofer in the direction of the arrow, with the FRONT indica- tion facing forwards.

Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly rotate the securing wheel clock- wise so that the subwoofer system is firmly in place.

Components

Fig. 140 Components of the vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit depends on the vehicle equipment. The following is a description for a vehicle with all options.

The individual elements of the vehicle tool kit Fig. 140

Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the handle for screwing and un- screwing the wheel bolts once loosened. The screwdriver bit is inter- changeable. The screwdriver may be found underneath the wheel span- ner.

Adapter for anti-theft bolt. SEAT recommend you carry the wheel bolt adapter in the vehicle tool kit at all times. The code number of the anti- theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the adapter. In case it is lost, another adapter can be ordered using this number. Note the anti-theft bolt code for the wheels and keep it in a place other than the vehicle.

Towline anchorage, removable.

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover, integral hubcaps and the wheel bolt caps.

1

2

3

4

249Practical information

Jack. Before storing the jack in the tool kit, fold its hook. The crank must then be folded tight against the side of the jack in order for it to be safely stored.

Wheel spanner.

Clips for wheel screw caps.

5

6

7

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

250 Practical information

Wheel trims

Introduction

Additional information and warnings:

Caring for and cleaning the vehicle exterior page 197

Vehicle tools page 247

Change wheel page 252

Tire Mobility Set page 258

WARNING

If the wheel trims are not appropriate or not fitted correctly, they could cause major accidents or damage.

Incorrectly mounted wheel trims may come off while driving and en- danger other road users.

Damaged trims must never be mounted on the wheels.

Always ensure that the brake ventilation and cooling is not cut off or blocked. This is also valid if hubcaps are fitted later. If there is not enough air, you may require significantly longer braking distances.

CAUTION Remove and remount wheel trims taking care to avoid damage to the vehi- cle.

Hubcaps

Fig. 141 Remove the hubcap of the steel wheel trim

In order to access the wheel bolts, first remove the hubcap.

Removing and fitting the hubcap

To remove, take the vehicle tool kit wire hook and attach it to the edge of the wheel trim Fig. 141.

Remove the trim by pulling it in the direction of the arrow.

To replace the hubcap, press the hubcap against the trim until it clicks into place.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be remounted after changing the tyre.

251Practical information

Full hubcaps

Fig. 142 Removing the full hubcap

Removing the full hubcap

Take the wheel brace and the wire hook from the vehicle tool kit page 247.

Hook the wire through one of the grooves on the hubcap.

Insert the wheel brace onto the wire hook Fig. 142 and pull the hub cap in the direction shown by the arrow.

Fitting hubcaps

Press the hubcap against the wheel so that the space for the valve fits over the tyre valve. Make sure that the hubcap is correctly fitted all the way around the wheel. If you are using an anti-theft wheel lock, screw it in the opposite position to the valve.

Wheel bolt caps

Fig. 143 Removing the wheel bolt caps

Removal

Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools page 247) over the cap until it clicks into place Fig. 143.

Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a special cap. This cap only fits on an- ti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel bolts.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

252 Practical information

Changing a wheel

Introduction

Some vehicle versions and models do not have a factory-fitted jack or box spanner. In this case, we recommend consulting a Specialised workshop to change the wheel.

You should only change the wheels yourself if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the procedure and you have all the necessary tools! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Vehicle key set page 28

Wheels and tyres page 210

In case of emergency page 241

Vehicle tools page 247

Wheel trims page 250

WARNING

Changing a wheel can be dangerous, especially on the hard shoulder. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Park your vehicle as safe distance from surrounding traffic to change a wheel.

When changing a wheel, keep all passengers and particularly chil- dren a safe distance away from the work area.

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users.

Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid. If necessary, support the jack on a wide solid base.

WARNING (Continued)

If you are changing a wheel yourself, you should be familiar with the required procedure. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Only use suitable tools that are not damaged when changing a wheel.

Always stop the engine, apply the handbrake lever firmly and place the selector lever in position P, or engage a gear for a manual gearbox to reduce the risk of the vehicle moving accidentally.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a reliable torque wrench.

253Practical information

Preparations for changing a wheel

Check list

Before changing a wheel, complete the following operations in the order given :

1. In the event of a flat tyre, park the vehicle a safe distance from traffic and on suitable ground.

2. Apply the handbrake firmly page 134.

3. Automatic gearbox: move the selector lever to position P page 124.

4. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition page 119.

5. Manual gearbox: Select a gear page 124.

6. Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for example, behind the safety barrier).

7. Chock the wheel opposite the wheel being changed with a stone or similar object.

8. If the luggage compartment is full: take the baggage out of the vehi- cle.

9. Remove the spare wheel or the temporary spare wheel and the vehi- cle tool kit from the luggage compartment.

10. Remove the wheel trims page 250.

WARNING

Failure to follow the checklist prepared for your own safety could lead to accidents and severe injuries.

Always complete the operations given in the checklist and observe the general rules of safety.

Wheel bolts

Fig. 144 Changing a wheel: Slacken the wheel bolts.

Fig. 145 Changing a wheel: Tyre valve 1 and position of anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2

Only use the tool supplied with the vehicle to loosen the wheel bolts.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

254 Practical information

If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down on the end of the wheel brace carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip.

Loosening wheel bolts

Fit the wheel brace as far as it will go over the wheel bolt Fig. 144.

Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise .

Loosening anti-theft wheel bolts

For wheels with full hubcap, the anti-theft wheel lock must be threaded into position Fig. 145 2 before mounting the hubcap. Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the full hubcap.

Take the adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts out of the vehicle tool kit.

Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt Fig. 145. Push it on as far as it will go.

Fit the wheel brace onto the adapter as far as possible.

Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise .

Important information about wheel bolts

The wheel rims and bolts have been designed to be fitted to factory op- tions. If different rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In some circumstances, wheel bolts from the same model vehicle should not be used.

Wheel bolt tightening torque

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 110 Nm. Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a reliable torque wrench.

If wheel bolts are rusty and it is difficult to tighten them, the threads should be replaced and cleaned before checking the tightening torque.

Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or the wheel hub threads. Although they have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not fitted correctly they could be released while driving leading to loss of vehicle control and serious damage.

Only use wheel bolts which correspond to the wheel rims in question.

Never use different wheel bolts.

The bolts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease and easy to thread.

To loosen and tighten the wheel bolts, always use the wheel brace supplied with the vehicle.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or the wheel hub threads. Al- though they have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims.

If the wheel bolts are not tightened to the correct torque, they may come loose while driving, and the bolts and rims may come out. If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be dam- aged.

255Practical information

Raising the vehicle with the jack

Fig. 146 Jack position points

Fig. 147 jack mounted on the left rear part of the vehi- cle

The jack may be applied only at the jacking points shown (marks on chas- sis) Fig. 146. Always the relevant jacking point for the wheel to be changed .

Raise the vehicle using only the designated jacking points.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

256 Practical information

Check list

For your own safety and that of other passengers, the following points should be observed in the order given :

1. Select a suitable flat and firm surface for raising the vehicle.

2. Switch off the engine, engage a gear (manual gearbox) or place the selector lever in position P page 124 and engage the handbrake page 134.

3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed with collapsible wheel chocks or other suitable objects.

4. Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel to be changed page 253.

5. Look below the vehicle for the jacking point Fig. 146 closest to the tyre which has to be changed.

6. Raise the jack with the handle until it can be inserted below the jack- ing point.

7. Ensure that the foot of the jack is firmly on the ground and that it is placed, at a vertical angle, immediately below the lifting point on the vehicle Fig. 147.

8. Straighten the jack and continue raising it using the handle until the claw holds the vertical reinforcement beneath the vehicle Fig. 147.

9. Raise the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the ground.

WARNING

If the vehicle is not correctly raised, it could fall off the jack causing seri- ous injury. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of in- jury:

You should only use a jack approved by SEAT for your vehicle. Other jacks, even those approved for other SEAT models, might slip out of place.

WARNING (Continued)

The ground should be firm and flat. If the ground is sloped or soft then the vehicle could slip and fall off the jack. If necessary, support the jack on a wide solid base.

If the ground is slippery (for example, on tiles), place a non-slip sur- face (for example a floor mat) beneath the jack to avoid slipping.

Only fit the jack at the prescribed jacking points. The claw of the jack should grip the reinforcement nerve on the underbody Fig. 147.

You should never have any limbs beneath a raised vehicle which is only supported by a jack.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!.

Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one side or the engine is run- ning.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. The vehicle may come loose from the jack due to the engine vibrations.

WARNING

Failure to follow the checklist prepared for your own safety could lead to accidents and severe injuries.

Always complete the operations given in the checklist and observe the general rules of safety.

257Practical information

Changing a wheel

Fig. 148 Changing a wheel: loosen wheel bolts with the socket at the end of the wheel brace

Removing the wheel

Please observe the check list page 253.

Loosen the wheel bolts page 253.

Jacking up the vehicle page 255.

Using the hexagonal socket in the wheel brace Fig. 148, unscrew the slackened wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface.

Take off the wheel.

How to use the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel

Check the direction of rotation of the tyre page 218, Tyre code.

Place the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel into position.

Replace the wheel bolts and tighten slightly using the hexagonal socket on the end of the wheel brace.

To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel bolts use the corresponding adaptor.

Lower the car with the jack.

Tighten all of the wheel bolts clockwise . Tighten the bolts in diago- nal pairs (not in a circle).

Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on page 250.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not treated suitably or not tightened to the correct torque then this could lead to loss of vehicle control and to a serious ac- cident.

All the wheel bolts and hub threads should be clean and free of oil and grease. The wheel bolts should be easily tightened to the correct tor- que.

The hexagonal socket in the wheel brace should be used for turning wheel bolts only. Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.

After changing the wheel

Clean the vehicle tools, if necessary and put them away in the luggage compartment foam holder page 247.

Store the spare wheel, the temporary spare wheel or the changed wheel securely in the luggage compartment.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possi- ble with a torque wrench page 254.

Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

258 Practical information

Anti-puncture kit*

Introduction

The Tyre Mobility Set* will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must again check the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tire mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the procedure and you have the necessary tire mobility set! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

The tyre sealant must not be used in the following cases:

If the wheel rim has been damaged.

In outside temperatures below -20 C (-4 F).

In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre greater than 4 mm.

If you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre.

If the sealant bottle has passes its use by date.

Additional information and warnings:

Vehicle key set page 28

Braking, stopping and parking page 134

Wheels and tyres page 210

In case of emergency page 241

Wheel trims page 250

WARNING

Using the tire mobility set can be dangerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Park your vehicle as safe distance from surrounding traffic to fill the tyre.

Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid.

All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area.

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users.

Use the tire mobility set only if you are familiar with the necessary procedure. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

The tire mobility set is intended for temporary, emergency use only. Use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop.

Replace the repaired tyre with the tire mobility set as soon as possi- ble.

The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin.

Always keep the tire mobility set out of the reach of small children.

Never use the approved jack, even if it has been approved for your ve- hicle.

Always stop the engine, apply the handbrake lever firmly and engage gear if using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of vehicle in- voluntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conventional tyre.

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

259Practical information

WARNING (Continued)

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

Drive only during 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and subsequently check the tyre.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of used or expired sealant observing any legal requirements.

Note A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships.

Note Take into account the separate instruction manual of the tire mobility set manufacturer*.

Components of the tire mobility set*

Fig. 149 Standard repre- sentation: Contents of the tire mobility set

The tire mobility set is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compartment. It includes the following components Fig. 149:

Tyre valve remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

Tube for inflating tyres

Warning provided by tyre pressure monitoring system1)

Air bleed screw2)

ON/OFF switch

12 volt connector

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1) A compressor may also be included. 2) In its place, the compressor may have a button.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

260 Practical information

Bottle of sealant1)

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also ap- plies to its replacement part 11 .

Preparation

Checklist

Before filling a tyre, complete the following operations in the order given :

1. In the event of a puncture, park the vehicle as far as possible from traffic and on flat, suitable ground.

2. Apply the handbrake firmly page 134.

3. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition page 119.

4. Manual gearbox: Select a gear page 124.

5. Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and wait in a safe place (for example, behind the safety barrier).

6. Switch on the hazard warning lights and set the warning triangle in position page 241. Observe legal requirements.

7. Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility Set page 258

8. If the luggage compartment is full: take the baggage out of the vehi- cle.

9. Remove the tire mobility set from the luggage compartment.

10. Apply the sticker Fig. 149 2 from the tire mobility set to the dash panel where it can be seen clearly.

11. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

10

11 WARNING

Failure to follow the checklist prepared for your own safety could lead to accidents and severe injuries.

Always complete the operations given in the checklist and observe the general rules of safety.

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing a tyre

Unscrew the tyre valve cap.

Use the corresponding enclosed extractor Fig. 149 1 to unscrew the tyre valve insert. Place the valve insert on a clean surface.

Vigorously shake the sealant bottle Fig. 149 10 for several seconds.

Screw the inflator tube Fig. 149 3 securely into the sealant bottle in a clockwise direction. The seal on the mouth of the bottle moves automati- cally.

Remove the lid from the filling tube Fig. 149 3 and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve.

Hold the tyre sealant can upside down and fill the complete contents of the can into the tyre.

Remove the tyre sealant bottle from the valve.

Screw the valve insert again with the corresponding enclosed extractor Fig. 149 1 into the tyre valve.

Inflating the tyre

Securely screw the tyre inflator tube Fig. 149 5 of the compressor in- to the tyre valve.

Check whether the air bleed screw Fig. 149 7 is closed.

1) A compressor may also be included.

261Practical information

Start the vehicle engine and leave it running.

Attach the connector Fig. 149 9 to a 12 volt socket of the vehicle page 117.

Connect the air compressor with the ON/OFF switch Fig. 149 8 .

Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi / 200-250 kPa) . Maximum operation time 8 minutes .

Disconnect the air compressor.

If it is not possible to achieve an air pressure of 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi / 200-250 kPa), unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.

Move the vehicle some 10 metres forwards or backwards so that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tyre interior.

Securely screw the compressor tyre inflator tube into the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process.

If the indicated pressure can still not be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre cannot be sealed with the anti-puncture kit. Do not con- tinue driving. You should obtain professional assistance .

Disconnect the air compressor and unscrew the flexible inflator tube from the tyre valve.

When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, immediately con- tinue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

After 10 minutes, Check the pressure again page 261.

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compressor and the inflator tube may become hot.

Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable material.

WARNING (Continued)

Allow them to cool before storing the device.

If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good con- dition to seal the tyre. Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tance.

CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after a maximum of 8 operational minutes to avoid overheating! Before switching on the air compressor again, let it cool for several minutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube Fig. 149 5 again and check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:

Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mo- bility set.

You should obtain professional assistance .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:

Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again page 210.

Carefully resume your journey until you reach the nearest specialised workshop without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

Have the damaged tyre replaced.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

262 Practical information

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious injury.

Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.

Seek specialist assistance.

263Practical information

Fuses

Introduction

Due to the constant update of vehicles, fuse assignments depending on equipment and the use of the same fuse for various electrical components, at the time of printing this manual it is not possible to provide an up-to-date summary of the electrical components fuse positions. For detailed informa- tion about the fuse positions, please consult a Technical Service.

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Like- wise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Additional information and warnings:

Working in the engine compartment page 180

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death!

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit with- out fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.

Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Never repair a fuse.

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple or similar.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the vehicles electric system, before replacing a fuse turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the keys from the ignition.

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system.

Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys- tem.

Note One single consumer could have more than one fuse.

Note Several consumers could run over one single fuse.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

264 Practical information

Vehicle fuses

Fig. 150 Below the driv- er side dash panel: fuse box cover

Fig. 151 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Identifying fuses situated below the driver-side dash panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

Opening and closing the fuse box situated below the dash panel

Opening: press the unlock button Fig. 150 1 until it is possible to open the cover.

Fold the cover down.

Closing: fold the cover up in the opposite direction to the arrow until it clicks into the locking lever 1 .

To open the engine compartment fuse box

Open the bonnet page 180.

Press the attachment tabs in the direction indicated by the arrow (thin arrows) to release the fuse box cover Fig. 151.

Then lift the cover out.

To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the attachment tabs down, in the opposite direction indicated by the arrow until they click audi- bly into place.

265Practical information

CAUTION Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle.

Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys- tem.

Note In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop.

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 152 Image of a blown fuse

Preparation

Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical equipment.

Open the corresponding fuse box page 264.

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 152.

Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make it easier to see if the fuse is blown.

To replace a fuse

Remove the fuse.

Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size .

Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

CAUTION If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to an- other part of the electrical system.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

266 Practical information

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain amount of manual skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recommends that you consult a Technical Service or request assis- tance from a specialist. In general a specialist is needed if, in addition to the bulbs, other vehicle components require removal.

You should store spare light bulbs in the vehicle for safety-relevant lights. Spare bulbs may be obtained from the Technical Services. In some coun- tries, it is a legal requirement to carry spare bulbs in the vehicle.

Driving with faults and blown bulbs on the vehicle exterior lighting is against the law.

Additional bulb specifications

The specifications of some headlamp bulbs and bulbs for the tail lamps fit- ted at the factory may be different to those of conventional bulbs. Bulb in- formation is displayed on the bulb socket or on the bulb itself.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Lights and visibility page 82

Working in the engine compartment page 180

Vehicle tools page 247

Fuses page 263

WARNING

If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle is not clearly visible to other drivers, there is a risk of accident.

WARNING

Failure to replace bulbs correctly may cause serious accidents.

Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment please read and observe the warnings page 180. In any vehicle, the engine com- partment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injury.

The bulbs H4, HB4 and H7 are pressurised and might explode on changing them.

Only replace the bulbs concerned when they have cooled.

Never replace bulbs alone if you are not familiar with the operations necessary. If you are not sure about procedures then visit a specialised workshop to carry out the necessary work.

Never touch the bulb glass directly. Fingerprints will be evaporated by the heat of the operating bulb thus fogging up the reflector.

The headlamp frameworks in the engine compartment and the tail lamps contain sharp elements. Always protect your hands when chang- ing bulbs.

CAUTION After changing a bulb, if the rubber covers are not replaced correctly on the headlamp framework, the electrical installation may be damaged, especial- ly if water is allowed to enter.

267Practical information

Information for replacing bulbs

Checklist

To replace a bulb, carry out the following operations always in the order giv- en :

1. Park the vehicle a safe distance from traffic and on suitable ground.

2. Apply the handbrake firmly page 134.

3. Turn the light switch to position 0 page 82.

4. Move the gear lever into the neutral position page 82.

5. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition page 119.

6. Automatic gearbox: move the selector lever to position P page 124.

7. Manual gearbox: Select a gear page 124.

8. Allow the corresponding bulb to cool.

9. Visually inspect fuses to see if any are blown page 263.

10. Replace the bulb according to the instructions . Bulbs should only be replaced by new identical models. Bulb information is dis- played on the bulb socket or on the bulb itself.

11. In general, never touch the bulb glass directly. The heat of the bulb would cause the fingerprint to evaporate and condense on the reflec- tor. This will impair the brightness of the headlight.

12. Check if the new bulb is working. If the bulb is not working, it may not have been correctly fitted, it could be damaged or the connector may not be correctly connected.

13. Every time a bulb for the headlights is replaced, visit a specialised workshop to check the headlights.

WARNING

Failure to follow the checklist prepared for your own safety could lead to accidents and severe injuries.

Always complete the operations given in the checklist and observe the general rules of safety.

CAUTION Always remove and fit headlights carefully to avoid damage to the paint- work and other vehicle parts.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

268 Practical information

Replacing the bulbs in the headlights

Fig. 153 In the engine compartment: Rear view of the front left headlight with rubber cover: A dipped beam and main beam headlights, B side lights and daytime driving lights and C turn signal

There is no need to remove the headlight to replace bulbs.

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

Fig. 153 A B C

Dipped beam and main beam headlights Side light and daytime driving light Turn signals (front)

1. Always take the checklist into account and take the necessary actions page 267.

2. Open the bonnet page 180.

3.

Remove the bulb connector H4. Remove the rubber cover using the tabs.

Turn the bulb holder in an anticlockwise direction as far as it will go and remove it, along with the bulb, pulling backwards.Press the retaining clip D downwards in

the direction of the arrow, and unclip side- ways and remove it.

4. Remove the bulb from the holder. If necessary, press the lock on the bulb holder.

5. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

269Practical information

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

Fig. 153 A B C

Dipped beam and main beam headlights Side light and daytime driving light Turn signals (front)

6. Insert the bulb, return it to its position and

insert the retaining clip D . Insert the bulb holder in the headlight and

turn it clockwise as far as the stop. Insert the bulb holder in the headlight and turn it clockwise as far as the stop.

7. Place the rubber cover and check that is

correctly in position. Insert the connector to the bulb H4.

Note The images show the left hand headlight from behind. The structure of the right hand side headlight is symmetric.

To replace the front bumper bulbs

Fig. 154 In the front right wheel arch: Remove the retaining screws (ar- rows) and take out the expansive rivet A .

Fig. 155 Changing the bulbs in the headlights

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

1. Always take the checklist into account and take the necessary ac- tions page 267.

2. Unscrew the 2 retaining screws of the wheel arch trim Fig. 154 (arrows) with the screwdriver from the vehicle took kit page 247.

3. Unscrew the expansive rivet in the lower front part of the wheel arch trim A with the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit and complete- ly remove it page 247.

4. Carefully fold the wheel arch trim to the side.

5. Release the connector Fig. 155 1 and remove it.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

270 Practical information

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

6. Turn the bulb holder Fig. 155 in the direction of the arrow, in an anticlockwise direction as far as it will go and remove it, along with the bulb, pulling backwards.

7. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

8. Insert the bulb holder in the headlight and turn it clockwise as far as the stop.

9. Plug the connector 1 into the bulb holder. The connector must au- dibly click into place.

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

10. Replace the wheel arch trim into its position.

11. Place the expansive rivet in the wheel arch trim and bumper and press it completely inwards Fig. 154 A .

12. Securely screw the 2 retaining screws Fig. 154 (arrows) with a screwdriver.

271Practical information

Changing the bulbs in the rear lights

Fig. 156 On the side of the luggage compartment: A: Remove the cover, B: Removing the tail light units

Fig. 157 Tail light unit: C: Remove the bulb holder, D: Remove the bulbs

Complete operations only in the sequence given. Removing the tail light units

1. Always take the checklist into account and take the necessary ac- tions page 267.

2. Open the rear lid page 39.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

272 Practical information

3. Carefully remove the cover 1 towards the lever Fig. 156 A.

4. Pull the release 3 in the connector 2 in the direction of the arrow Fig. 156 B. Use the screwdriver in the vehicle tool kit.

5. Press position 4 and remove the connector 2 Fig. 156 B.

6. Unscrew the wing nut 5 Fig. 156 B.

7. Remove the tail light from the bodywork by carefully pulling back- wards.

8. Disassemble the tail light unit and place it on a flat, clean surface.

To change the bulb

9. Unlock the bulb holder locking tab (arrow) Fig. 157 C and remove the bulb holder from the tail light.

10. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb Fig. 157 D.

11. Place the lamp holder in the tail light unit. The attachment tabs (ar- row) should audibly click into place Fig. 157 C.

Assembling the tail light units

12. Carefully insert the tail light unit into the opening in the bodywork.

13. Support the tail light with one hand in the assembly position and securely screw the wing nut with the other 5 Fig. 156 B.

14. Ensure that the tail light unit has been correctly fitted and is firmly secured.

15. Insert the connector 2 into the bulb holder and press the lock 3

on the connector in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig. 156 B.

16. Insert the cover. The cover should lock into place.

17. Close the rear lid page 39.

Changing the number plate light

Fig. 158 On the rear bumper: Remove number plate light

Fig. 159 Number plate light: Remove the lamp holder

273Practical information

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

1. Always take the checklist into account and take the necessary ac- tions page 267.

2. With one hand, press on the number plate light from left to right and remove it from the bumper Fig. 158.

3. Detach the number plate light carefully from the bumper.

4. Turn the bulb holder with the bulb anticlockwise and remove it in the direction of the arrow Fig. 159.

5. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

6. Place the bulb holder in the number plate light and press in the op- posite direction to the arrow as far as possible Fig. 159.

7.

Insert the number plate light carefully into the left edge of the open- ing on the bumper. During this process, check that the assembly di- rection of the number plate light is correct, i.e. the spring must be on the right.

8. Insert the number plate light into the bumper until it audibly clicks into place.

Changing the side turn signal bulb

Fig. 160 Removing the side turn signal

Fig. 161 Side turn sig- nal: Changing the bulbs

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

1. Always take the checklist into account and take the necessary ac- tions page 267.

2. With one hand move the side turn signal backwards Fig. 160 1 .

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

274 Practical information

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

3. Remove the side turn signal from the chassis by leverage 2 .

4. Remove the bulb holder with the bulb in the direction of the arrow Fig. 161 1 .

5. Remove the bulb holder bulb in a straight direction.

6. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

7. Install the lamp holder.

8. Place the side turn signal on the chassis on the side situated to- wards the rear of the vehicle until the spring clicks into the other side of the side turn signal.

275Practical information

Starting assistance

Introduction

If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery of an- other vehicle can be used to start the engine. Before starting, check the magic eye on the battery page 193.

For starting assistance, jump lead cables conforming to the standard DIN 72553 are required (see the cable manufacturer instructions). The cable section in vehicles with petrol engine must be at least 25 mm2.

Additional information and warnings:

Working in the engine compartment page 180

Vehicle battery page 193

WARNING

Incorrect use of jump leads and incorrectly jump starting could cause the battery to explode resulting in serious injury. Please observe the follow- ing rules to minimise the risk of a battery explosion:

All work involving the vehicle battery and electrical system can cause corrosion, fire and serious electric shocks. Always read and take into ac- count the safety warnings and standards before beginning work on the battery page 193, Vehicle battery.

The battery providing current must have the same voltage (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see markings on battery) as the flat battery.

Never charge a frozen or recently thawed battery. A flat battery can al- so freeze at temperatures close to 0 C (+32 F).

If a battery is frozen and/or has been frozen then it must be replaced.

WARNING (Continued)

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is being charged. Always keep lit cigarettes, open flames, sparks and fire far from the battery. Never use a mobile telephone when connecting and removing the jump leads.

Charge the battery only in well ventilated areas given that when the battery is charged by outside assistance, it creates a mix of highly explo- sive gases.

Jump leads should never enter into contact with moving parts in the engine compartment.

Never switch the positive and negative poles or connect the jump leads incorrectly.

Note the instruction manual provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

CAUTION To avoid considerable damage to the vehicle electrical system, note the fol- lowing carefully:

If the jump leads are incorrectly connected, this could result in a short circuit.

The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

276 Practical information

How to jump start: description

Fig. 162 Diagram of con- nections for vehicles without Start-Stop sys- tem.

Fig. 163 Diagram of con- nections for vehicles with Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + termi- nal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 162.

3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter- minal + in the vehicle providing assistance B .

4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle pro- viding assistance B Fig. 162.

For vehicles with Start-Stop system: Connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block Fig. 163.

5. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid met- al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. However, connect it to a point as far as possible from the battery A .

6. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Starting

7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.

8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait two or three minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights (if they are switched on).

277Practical information

10.Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehi- cle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected.

11.When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse or- der to the details given above.

Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about half a minute.

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 182.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, dan- ger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

WARNING (Continued)

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

278 Practical information

Towing and tow starting

Introduction

When towing or tow starting, respect the legal requirements.

For technical reasons, it is not possible to tow a vehicle if the battery is flat.

Additional information and warnings:

Exterior detail page 6

Electronic power control and exhaust gases purification system page 237

WARNING

A vehicle with a flat battery should never be towed.

Never remove the key from the ignition lock. Otherwise, the steering wheel lock could suddenly lock. Then the vehicle will be uncontrollable. You may lose control of the vehicle and there is a risk of serious accident.

WARNING

When towing the vehicle, the handling and braking efficiency change considerably. Please observe the following instructions to minimise the risk of serious accidents and injury:

As the driver of the vehicle being towed:

The brake must be depressed must harder as the brake servo does not operate. Always remain aware to avoid collision with the towing vehicle.

More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steer- ing does not operate when the engine is switched off.

As the driver of the towing vehicle:

Accelerate gently and carefully.

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

Brake well in advance than usual and brake gently.

CAUTION Carefully fit and remove the towline anchorage and its cover to avoid damage to the vehicle (for example, paintwork).

When towing, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and cause dam- age!

Note Fitting a towline anchorage to the rear bumper is not possible. The vehicle is not suitable for towing other vehicles.

279Practical information

Instructions for tow starting

In general, the vehicle should not be started by towing. Jump-starting is much more preferable page 275.

For technical reasons, the following vehicles can not be tow started:

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

If the vehicle battery is flat, it is possible that the engine control unit does not operate correctly.

However, if your vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (manual gearbox):

Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch on the ignition and the hazard warning lights.

Release the clutch when both vehicles are moving.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent a collision with the towing vehicle.

CAUTION When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Notes on towing

Tow rope or tow bar

When towing, the tow bar is the safest and vehicle friendly way. You should only use a tow rope if you do not have a tow bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic mate- rial.

Only secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towline anchorage or specially designed fitting.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Note the following for a towed vehicle:

Make sure the gear selector lever is in the N position.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) when towing a vehicle.

Do not tow further than 50 km (30 miles).

If a breakdown truck is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels raised.

Situations in which the vehicle should not be towed

In the following cases, the vehicle should not be towed but transported on a trailer or special vehicle:

If the vehicle gearbox does not contain lubricant due to a fault.

If the battery is flat as the steering cannot be unlocked, as a result, the electronic steering lock and electronic parking brake cannot be disengaged.

If the vehicle to be towed has an automatic gearbox and the distance to be covered is greater than 50 km (30 miles).

Note The vehicle can only be towed if the steering lock electronic gearbox lock is deactivated. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be started using jump leads to deactivate the steer- ing column electronic gearbox lock.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

280 Practical information

Fitting the front towline anchorage

Fig. 164 On the right- hand side of the front bumper: Remove the cov- er

Fig. 165 On the right- hand side of the front bumper: Screw in the towline anchorage

The location for the removable tow ring is on the right-hand side of the front bumper behind a cover Fig. 164.

The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle.

Note the instructions for towing page 279.

To fit the towline anchorage

Take the towline anchorage from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage com- partment page 247.

Press the upper part of the cover Fig. 164 (arrow) to disengage and release the cover.

Remove the cover and leave it hanging from the vehicle.

Screw in the tow ring into its housing anticlockwise as far as it will go Fig. 165 . Use a suitable tool to firmly tighten the towline anchorage in its location.

After towing, remove the tow ring by turning it clockwise.

Place the cover upper tab on the opening of the bumper and carefully hold the lower tab on the edge of the opening. If necessary, press the lower tab from below.

Press the lower area of the cover until the lower tab engages in the bumper.

CAUTION The towline anchorage must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.

Towing advice

Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. For this reason, inexperienced drivers should abstain.

While driving, avoid excessive traction forces and jerking. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.

281Practical information

If the vehicle is towed, with the hazard warning lights on and the ignition switched on, the turn signal may be used to indicate changes of direction. Simply operate the turn signal lever as usual. Meanwhile, the hazard warn- ing lights will go off. When the turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi- tion, the hazard warning lights will be turned on automatically.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

Keep the ignition running to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not run- ning, you will need more strength to steer than normally.

The brake must be depressed must harder as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid hitting the towing vehicle.

Note the instructions and information contained in the Instruction Man- ual for the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid sudden manoeuvres.

Brake well in advance than usual and brake gently.

Note the instructions and information contained in the Instruction Man- ual for the vehicle to be towed.

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

282 Description of specifications

Technical specifications

Description of specifications

Technical specifications

Introduction

The information in the vehicle documentation always takes precedence over the information in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Mainte- nance Programme or the vehicle registration documentation shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit- ted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Additional information and warnings:

Transporting page 95

Ecological driving page 144

Fuel page 177

Engine oil page 185

Engine coolant page 189

Wheels and tyres page 210

Notes for the user page 233

WARNING

Failure to observe requirements for weight, loads, dimensions and maxi- mum speed may lead to severe accident.

283Description of specifications

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 166 Vehicle data la- bel:

Fig. 167 Vehicle identifi- cation number

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from out- side the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen Fig. 167. This viewer is located in the lower part of the windscreen. The vehicle identification

number (chassis number) is also stamped on the right water drain channel. The water drain channel is located between the suspension tower and the wing. Open the bonnet to read the vehicle identification number .

Vehicle data plate

The vehicle data label Fig. 166 is at the front of the spare wheel well. It contains the following data:

Vehicle identification number (chassis number)

Vehicle type, engine power, gearbox type

Engine and gearbox code, paint number, interior equipment.

Optional extras, PR numbers

These data are also provided in the Maintenance Programme.

Specific vehicle weight information

The instructions in the official vehicle documents take precedence. All the technical data provided in this documentation is applicable to the basic model. The vehicle data label in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle documentation shows which engine is installed in your vehicle.

The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit- ted, for different models and for special vehicles.

Kerb weight values shown in the following table apple for a vehicle with driver (75 kg), liquids including a fuel tank 90% full, in addition to tools and a spare wheel . The kerb weight indicated increases with optional equipment and retrofitting of accessories, while proportionally reducing car- rying capacity.

The load is equivalent to the following weights:

1

2

3

4

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

284 Description of specifications

Passengers.

Total equipment.

Roof load, included in the carrier.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised weight and the load on the axles could cause damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.

The real load on the axles should never exceed the maximum permit- ted.

The load and its distribution in the vehicle have effects on the vehicle handling and the braking ability. Always drive at a suitable speed.

CAUTION Distribute the load as uniformly and as low down on the vehicle as possible. When transporting heavy objects in the luggage compartment, these should be placed as far forward as possible or over the rear axle to have as little influence on handling as possible.

Information on fuel consumption

The consumption and emission values indicated do not refer to one specific vehicle. They are only to be used to compare the values of the different ve- hicle versions. The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of a vehicle not on- ly depend on the effective use of fuel. They also depend on your driving style and other non-technical factors.

Calculation of fuel consumption

Fuel consumption and emission values are determined according to the cur- rent version of the 715/2007/EC or 80/1268/EEC regulation and are valid for the vehicle kerb weight. The specifications do not refer to an individual

vehicle. To measure the fuel consumption, two measuring cycles are carried out on a rolling road test bed. The test criteria are as follows:

Urban cycle Measurement of the urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated at between 0 and 50 km/ h (0 and 31 mph).

Road cycle

In the road cycle simulation, the car undergoes frequent ac- celeration and braking in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h (0 and 75 mph).

Combined The average combined consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37 % for the urban cycle and 63 % for the road cycle.

CO2 emis- sions of the combination

The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dioxide emissions (urban and road). The gas composition is then analysed to evaluate the CO2 con- tent and other emissions.

Note The kerb weight may vary according to the vehicle equipment. This could raise consumption and the CO2 emissions slightly.

Note In practice, consumption values could be different to the values calculated based on the 715/2007/EC or 80/1268/EEC regulations.

285Description of specifications

Engine specifications

Petrol engine 1.0 44 kW (60 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

44 (60)/ 5000-6000 95/ 3000-4300 3/999 Super 95 RONa)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.

Performance Manual Ecomotive Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 160 161 160

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 9.1 9.1 9.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 14.4 14.4 15.3

Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 emissions (g/km)

Urban cycle 5.6/130 5/116 5.3/123

Extra-urban cycle 3.9/91 3.6/84 3.9/91

Combined 4.5/105 4.1/95 4.4/103

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1290 1290 1290

Weight in running order (with driver) 929 940 932

Gross front axle weight 680 680 680

Gross rear axle weight 640 640 640

Permitted roof load 50 50 50

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

286 Description of specifications

Petrol engine 1.0 55 kW (75 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

55 (75)/ 6200 95/ 3000-4300 3/999 Super 95 RONa)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.

Performance Manual Start-Stop Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 171 172 171

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.3 8.3 9.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.2 13.2 13.9

Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 emissions (g/km)

Urban cycle 5.9/137 5.1/118 5.5/127

Extra-urban cycle 4/93 3.7/86 4/94

Combined 4.7/108 4.2/98 4.5/105

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1290 1290 1290

Weight in running order (with driver) 929 940 932

Gross front axle weight 680 680 680

Gross rear axle weight 640 640 640

Permitted roof load 50 50 50

287Description of specifications

Petrol engine / CNG 1.0 50 kW (68 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

50 (68)/ 6200 90/3000 3/999 CNG / Super 95 RONa)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.

Performance Petrol CNG

Top speed (km/h) 164

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 10.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 16.3

Consumption (l/100 km) / CO2 emissions (g/km)

Urban cycle 5.5/99 3.6/99

Extra-urban cycle 3.8/68 2.5/68

Combined 4.4/79 2.9/79

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 1370

Weight in running order (with driver) 1031

Gross front axle weight 680

Gross rear axle weight 640

Permitted roof load 50

Vehicle diagram Prior to a journey... While driving Care, cleaning and mainte- nance

If and when Technical specifications

288 Description of specifications

Dimensions

Longitude 3557 mm

Width 1641 - 1645 mm

Height, unladen 1478 - 1489 mm

Wheelbase 2420 mm

Turning circle diametera) approx. 9.8 m

Front track widtha) 1412 - 1428 mm

Rear track widtha) 1408 - 1424 mm

Ground clearance with maximum au- thorised load

109 mm

a) Depending on the dimensions of the wheel trims and tyres, there may be variations.

CAUTION Special care should be taken when parking in areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Objects protruding from the ground may damage the bumper or other parts of the vehicle during manoeuvres.

Special attention is required when driving through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or other objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers, mudguards and running gear, and the engine and exhaust system could be damaged as you drive over these objects.

Capacities

Fuel tank capacity

Petrol engines Around 35.0 l

, of which approximately 4.0 are the reserve.

Index

A Abroad

Extended stay abroad with your vehicle . . 234 Sale of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

ABS See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223

Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Adjust Headlight range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Adjustment Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Deactivating the front passenger front air-

bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Deactivating using the key switch . . . . . . . . 71 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Differences between front passenger front

airbag systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Locking the vehicle after airbag deploy- ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Use of child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Air conditioner Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 User instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 temporarily switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Aluminium care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Anodized surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Anti-theft bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Anti-theft locking bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Anti-theft wheel locking bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

ASR see Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Assistance systems Brake assist system (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Electronic differential lock system (EDL) . 140 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) . . . . 139 Hill hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Optical parking system (OPS) . . . . . . . . . . 150 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Parking distance warning system . . . . . . . 150 Safety Assist (City Safety Assist function) 155 Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . 140 Traction Control (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Assist systems Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . 140

Audible warnings Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Seat belt not fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Automatic belt retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Automatic consumer disconnection . . . . . . . . 196

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

289Index

Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . 121 starting on a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 stopping on a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

B BAS

see Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Battery Change in the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 See Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Battery acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Before consulting a specialised workshop . . . 239

Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Service and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Belt tension limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Bonnet Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Brake assist system (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Brakes Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Changing the brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Emergency brake indicator in case of sud-

den braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Running-in brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139

Brake system Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Breakdown Securing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Bulb fault See changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

C Capacities

Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Care See "Care of your vehicle" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Care of your vehicle Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Caring for paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 locking and unlocking from the exterior . . . 33 locking and unlocking from the inside . . . . 34 "Safe" Deadlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Central locking system After airbag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Opening doors individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 13 Bottom part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Top part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Changing Windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Initial operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 in the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Sea changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

290 Index

Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Engaging gears (automatic gearbox) . . . . 129 Engaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . 128 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 with Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Changing gears Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Changing the bulbs Side turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Changing the wheel After changing the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Checking Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Checklist Before working in the engine compart-

ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 In case of an emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Check list Journey preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Preparations for changing a wheel . . . . . . 253 Raising the vehicle with the jack . . . . . . . . 256

Checklist Refilling precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Check list Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Checklist Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Tire Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Transporting children in the vehicle . . . . . . 75

Check list Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Child safety seat Securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Child seat ISOFIX child seat on rear seats . . . . . . . . . . 78 Mounting child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Mounting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 On rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 On the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Securing using a Top Tether retaining strap 81 Securing using ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Securing using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Transporting children in the vehicle . . . . . . 75 Weight categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Disabling the front passenger front airbag 71

Chromework care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

City Safety Assist function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 See "Care of your vehicle" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Close Sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof . 43

Closing Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 from the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Rear Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Collection of end-of-life vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Compartments Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 111 luggage compartment variable floor . . . . 101 Other storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . 112 Passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 111 Sunglasses storage compartment . . . . . . 110

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Conformity certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Consumer disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Consumption How it is determined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

control lamp on the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

291Index

Control lamp Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Brake pad wear warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . 185 City Safety Assist function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Engine oil sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Hill hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Control lamps Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Controlling function Electric exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Convenience functions Reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Coolant See engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Crossing a river Salt water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Cruise control system (CCS) Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

D Damaged tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . 59

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 208

Data link connector (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Data registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Data storage during the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Data stored by the control units . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

De-icing the door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

De-icing the locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Deadlock system"Safe" SAFELOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Deadlock (immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Detail passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Diagnostics connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Differential lock See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Disposal Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 End-of-life vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Door handle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Door release lever interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . 244

Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Drinks bottles see Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Driver door Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Driver position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driving Check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Driving with an automatic gearbox . . . . . . 131 Ecological . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Economic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Fuel level to low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Journey preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Parking downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Parking uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Protection of the undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . 25 starting on a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

292 Index

stopping on a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Driving abroad Check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Driving advice Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Driving in winter Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 200

Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Driving tips Driving a loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

E Ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Economic driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

EDL See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 242

Electrical consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Electrical power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

electric windows Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Electric windows see Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Electric Windows Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Electronic differential lock system (EDL) . . . . 140

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) . . . . . . . 139

Emergency brake indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . 244 Driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Emission control system Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Engaging gears Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Engine Noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Engine and ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 12 Volt sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Water box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Environment Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Exterior aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

293Index

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Controlling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Exterior views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

F FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Fault Parking distance warning system . . . . . . . 150

Fault finding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Fault memory Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Refilling precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

First-aid kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 see First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Front airbags See "Airbag system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Front passenger front airbag Deactivating using the key switch . . . . . . . . 71 See "Airbag system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Information on consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Type of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Fuel consumption Economic driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Why does it increase? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Fuel tank flap close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

G General instrument panel

Turn signal and headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . 83

Glove compartment see Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 111

H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Headlamp range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Headlights Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Heating and ventilation system Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 see also Air conditioning system . . . . . . . 164

High pressure cleaning apparatus . . . . . . . . . 199

Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Hill hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Ignition See "Engine and ignition" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Ignition key see vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Safety interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

294 Index

Immobilizer Operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

In case of a breakdown Securing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

In case of an emergency Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 In case of a breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Protecting yourself and securing the vehi-

cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Information on consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Initial operations Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

InSP Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Display control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

In the event of an emergency Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 see Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Journey preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

K key

see vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Key see vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Key switch Deactivating the front passenger front air-

bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

L Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Laser sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 see Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Controls lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Instruments lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Parking light remains on both sides . . . . . . 85 Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 turning on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Load Driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Transporting a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 General tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Loading luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 98 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Locking from the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Rear Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Luggage compartment Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . 101 expand downwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 expand forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

M Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Malfunction automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

295Index

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 see also Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Manufacturer identification plate . . . . . . . . . . 283

mechanical locking locking and unlocking from the exterior . . . 33 locking and unlocking from the inside . . . . 34

Mirrors Convenience functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Mobile telephone Using without an exterior aerial . . . . . . . . 227

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 233

Modifications to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

N Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

New engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

New tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

New tyres and wheels About your tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Noises Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Notes for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

O Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Off road driving Protection of the undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . 25

Oil See engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Older tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Onboard diagnostic system (ODB) . . . . . . . . . 227

Open Sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof . 43

Opening Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 from the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Opening doors individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Operating fault Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Operating faults Radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 234

Optical parking system (OPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Outside temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Overview Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 The driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

P Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 136

Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Parking distance warning system Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Optical parking system (OPS) . . . . . . . . . . 150 Using high pressure cleaning apparatus . 199

Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Parking light remains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Parking sensor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

ParkPilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 127

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Portable Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Preparation Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . 191 Tire Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

296 Index

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Work in the engine compartment . . . . . . . 182

Preparations before each journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . 186 Topping up the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . 186

Principles of physics regarding a frontal colli- sion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Protection of the undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Protection of vehicle undercarriage . . . . . . . . 203

Pushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

R Radio reception

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 234

Raising the vehicle Check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Raising vehicle Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 With a lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Reading the Fault memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Rear backrest Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Lifting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Rear head restraints Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . 245 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 see rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 See "Rear lid" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Rear Lid Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Rear vision mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Refilling precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Refuelling At the filling station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Remote control key see vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Removing snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Removing wax deposits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 224 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223

Reprogramming control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Reservoir capacity Windscreen washer water reservoir . . . . . . 92

Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Retro-fitting Two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Vehicle telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Running-in Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 First trips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Running-in brake pads Please also see "Brakes" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Running in Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

S Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Safety Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

297Index

Sale of vehicle In other countries / continents . . . . . . . . . 234

Salt water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Automatic belt retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Belt tension limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Seat belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Seat belt status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Twisted belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Unfastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

SEAT information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Adjusting the steering wheel position . . . . 52 Adjust the rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . 51 Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Fitting the rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . 52 Front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Rear backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Removing and fitting rear head restraints . 52

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Set Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Side airbags See "Airbag system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Sistemas ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Sitting position Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Sliding/tilting electric panoramic sunroof . . . . 43 Anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Small window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Socket 12 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Spare fuel canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Spare key see vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Driving advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Special features Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 High pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . 199 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 137, 288

Pushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Special notes Long parking times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 279 Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Starting using an external battery See Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Tendency to pull to one side . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Steering wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Storage compartment Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Driver side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Sudden braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

298 Index

Sunglasses storage compartment . . . . . . . . . 110

Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Symbols see warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Systems ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . 140 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Brake assist system (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Electronic differential lock system (EDL) . 140 Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) . . . . 139 Hill hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Optical parking system (OPS) . . . . . . . . . . 150 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Parking distance warning system . . . . . . . 150 Safety Assist (City Safety Assist function) 155 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . 140 Traction Control (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

T Tank flap

close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

TC see Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Technical data Axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Engine oil specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Manufacturer identification plate . . . . . . . 283 Reservoir capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Total weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Vehicle data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Technical information Type of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Temperature display Liquid coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Driving advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Things to note Disconnecting the vehicle's battery . . . . . . 21 parking distance warning system . . . . . . . 150 Removing the key from the vehicle . . . . . . 121 Water underneath the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 168

Tightening torque Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

TIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Tips for driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Before starting out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

tire mobility set Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Tire Mobility Set Check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Do not use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Tools see Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Total weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 278 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Special notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 279 Tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Traction Control (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Trailer coupling Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Transporting a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

299Index

Transporting a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Transporting children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 75 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Transporting objects Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 105

Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Turn signal convenience feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Type of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Tyre load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Tyre pressure Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Tyre repair kit see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . 220

U Unlocking

from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Padding cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

V Valve caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Vehicle Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 locking and unlocking from the exterior . . . 33 locking or unlocking from the inside . . . . . 34 Parking downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Parking uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Securing in case of a breakdown . . . . . . . 241

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Checking the electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 194 Discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Explanation of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Vehicle care Aerial built into the window . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Airbag modules (dash panel) . . . . . . . . . . 208 Aluminium wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 anodized surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . 201 Chrome wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Cleaning compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Cleaning wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Cleaning windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 201 Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 De-icing the door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . 203 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Fabric trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 High pressure cleaning apparatus . . . . . . 199 Padding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Protection of vehicle undercarriage . . . . . 203 Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 199 Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Vehicle paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Windscreen wiper service position . . . . . . . 91 Wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Vehicle code Vehicle data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Vehicle data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Vehicle diagram Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Side view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Vehicle key assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

300 Index

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Vehicle key set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Vehicle mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Vehicle telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Vehicle's battery Automatic consumer disconnection . . . . . 196 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Running flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Vibrations Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

W Warning and control lamps

Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Warning lamp Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 City Safety Assist function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Hill hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 with high pressure cleaning apparatus . . 199

Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Water box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Wear of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 253 Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Wheel load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Beadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Bolted trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 See "Wheels and tyres" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Avoiding damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Damaged tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Errors in wheel alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Foreign bodies in the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Interchanging tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 New tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Older tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Replacing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Run-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 220 storing the replaced wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Storing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Tyre code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Tyre identification number (TIN) . . . . . . . . 219 Tyre load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Tyres with directional tread pattern . 211, 220 Valve caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Wear of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Full hub caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Hub caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Wheel bolt caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Windscreen Heat-insulating glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Windscreen washer water Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

301Index

Windscreen wipers Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . 90 Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Windscreen wiper service position . . . . . . . . . . 91

Windscreen with metal coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Windscreen with reflective infrared coating . . . 88

Other Characters "Safe" Deadlock system

SAFE lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

What happens if...? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

302 Index

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.10.13

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Mii Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Mii Edition 10.13 2013 Electric Vehicle Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Mii as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Mii. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Mii Edition 10.13 2013 Electric Vehicle Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Mii Edition 10.13 2013 Electric Vehicle Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Mii Edition 10.13 2013 Electric Vehicle Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Mii Edition 10.13 2013 Electric Vehicle Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Mii Edition 10.13 2013 Electric Vehicle Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.